wr-1417 rfq for budgetary package
Post on 16-Nov-2014
169 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 1
Project Name : TO REPAIR INERT GAS GENERATOR UNITS ON FSO2
Project No. : WR-1417
Location : FSO2
Date : 4th June 2008
0 2/27/2009 Issued for Quotation CC TJ
Rev. Date Description Prepare Review App’d
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 2
Table of Contents
1. General 3
1.1 Introduction 3
1.2 CONTRACTOR Quotation / Proposal 3
1.4 Schedule 4
1.5 Commercial Document 4
2 Scope of Service 4
2.1 Detail of scope 4
3. Technical 6
3.1 Drawings 6
3.2 Specification and Datasheet 6
4. Procurement Strategy 6
6. Proposal Standard Format Error! Bookmark not defined.
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 3
1. General
1.1 Introduction
Inert Gas Generator on FSO2 at BONGKOT Field, Mid of THAI Gulf has required the replacement of the shell and jacket due to corrosion. With the small access way to their location, the new IGG shall be separable type. Each of part shall be smaller than 1.6 m x 1.6 m x 1.6 m.
1.2 CONTRACTOR Quotation / Proposal
The CONTRACTOR is requested to submit the best Lump sum prices and Schedule for prefabrication of 2 sets of IGG. The proposal requirement is following.
a. Within forty-eight (48) hours from the receipt of the RFQ documents, CONTRACTOR shall sign and return a letter of Acknowledgement to COMPANY.
b. The language for all Documents and Communication shall be in English.
c. QUOTATION shall be submitted to COMPANY no later than March 10th, 2009
d. QUOTATION shall be shown the name of the CONTRACTOR and the reference to the present RFQ.
e. QUOTATION will be addressed for the attention of Ammikhar S. (PDC Construction Department) with copy to Preekamol T. (Procurement Officer).
f. The Quotation shall be prepared a firm and fixed for Total lump sum price. The quoted price shall be included the details engineering work, material & consumable procurement, prefabrication, QA/QC and transportation to PTTEP logistic base at SONGKHLA.
g. CONTRATOR is required to submit Onshore-Offshore and transportation unit rate of Personnel for supervising the installation work during installation. The transportation rate for supervisor shall be consisted of all transportation cost, accommodation, meal and personnel cost & expense during transportation. CONTRACTOR shall submit both of working rate and standby rate for clarification if the bad weather is found during work. The only manpower stand-by cost due to bad weather and/or due to COMPANY instruction will be responded by COMPANY. The other stand by cost due to the failure of CONTRACTOR in safety practice or performance will be responded by CONTRACTOR. The transportation from PAVINLION Hotel or BP SAMILA Hotel to Heliport and from Heliport to HADYAI Airport shall be support by COMPANY shuttle bus.
h. Supervisor for offshore work shall submit medical checkup report to COMPANY for approval within 2 weeks before offshore visiting. The cost of checkup shall be responded by CONTRACTOR. The checkup program is shown in HSE Instruction for CONTRACTOR, SG.PHS.001/03-R2 which attached in APPENDIX-C.
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 4
1.4 Schedule
The schedule as shown in this section is only guideline. It should be adjusted by CONTRACTOR after receiving of service order. However the prefabrication should be completed for installation before Typhoon season during October to February.
Commencement Date: April 1st, 2009
Completion Date: July 1st, 2009
After receiving of service order CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the updated work schedule for review.
1.5 Commercial Document
The CONTRACTOR shall submit as a minimum of document to COMPANY attached in the proposal as the following.
a. Quotation in Lump sum price and details of price structure, Onshore-Offshore unit rate of Supervisor, Mobilization rate of supervisor and Transportation price of IGG.
b. Technical Exception / Deviation Sheet (if any)
Note: The details price structure is shown in standard format which attached in APPENDIX-A. However the term condition shall be complied with PTTEP standard.
2 Scope of Service The scope as list below is guideline for estimation. They shall be adjusted to suitable with the working of CONTRACTOR.
An accurate site survey prior to accurate dimension for details design.
Details design and prepare the fabrication drawings of the new IGG. The new IGG drawing and the existing IGG drawing have been attached in APPENDIX-B.
Procure material and consumable for prefabrication of IGG
Prefabricate and Inspect the both of IGG as per approved drawings.
Prepare QA/QC dossier and submit COMPANY for review
Packing and transport the prefabricated IGG to PTTEP logistic at SONGKHLA.
2.1 Detail of scope
2.1.1 Planning: Within 1 week after receiving of service order, CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the updated work schedule.
2.1.2 Site survey: CONTRACTOR shall submit the request for site survey at least 1 week before visit the site. The surveyor name, copy of ID card or Passport and their Medical checkup report shall be submitted COMPANY for registering in chopper booking system. After booking the booking flight shall be shown in the afternoon of the day before traveling.
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 5
Within 1 week after completing of site survey, CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the site survey report for review.
2.1.3 Details Engineering Design: The designing shall be complied with attached data sheet if there is not specified below.
• The design and fabrication shall be complied with ASME Section VIII Div.1 but the code stamp is not required. Within 4 weeks after receiving of service order, CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the calculation sheet for review.
• Within 6 weeks after receiving of service order CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the construction drawing with MTO for review before fabrication starting.
• All steel and piping materials shall be SS316L grade. Bolt-Nut shall be A193-B8M CL2/ A194-8MA.
• The Gasket material shall be suitable for high temperature condition. CONTRACTOR shall specify and submit COMPANY the material for approval.
• Within 2 weeks after completing of details design CONTRACTOR shall submit CONPANY the concern document as specified in TOTAL Specification GS-PVV-211(4) for approval.
2.1.4 Procurement:
• The origin of all of materials shall not be China, India, Eastern Europe and South of America. Their material certificates shall be submitted COMPANY for approval before starting of fabrication.
• All materials shall be delivered with mill inspection certificates, type 3.1.B according to EN STD 10204. The CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY, all of mill inspection certificates prior to pre-fabrication.
2.1.5 Fabrication works:
• Before starting of prefabrication work, CONTRACTOR shall submit COMPANY the qualification record of personnel who perform fabrication welding works and related non-destructive examinations according to ASME Section VIII Division1, TOTAL Specifications No.GS-PVV-211(4), PTTEP inspection requirement for welding activities INSP-BKY-030(1), and CONTRACTOR’s fabrication procedure.
• Assembly: During the pre-fabrication stage, assembly shall be checked by a 100% in-process and visual examination. Only qualified welder supported by relevant qualification record shall perform tack welding.
• Welding: The only qualified welders supported by relevant qualification record shall be accepted for welding work comply with TOTAL Specifications No. GS-PVV-211(4) and GS-PVV-611(4).
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 6
• Non-destructive testing: The weldment inspection will comply with TOTAL Specifications No. GS-PVV-211(4) and GS-PVV-611(4).
• Hydrostatic testing: The Pressure testing will comply with TOTAL Specifications No. GS-PVV-211(4) and GS-PVV-611(4).
• Painting: The external surface shall be applied the painting system P05 2nd of TOTAL Specification GS-COR-350(5). The approved paint is “International Coatings” and “JOTAN”. The color code is white, RAL 9010.
3. Technical
3.1 Drawings
Engineering drawings as listed below are attached in APPENDIX B.
• P&ID of the existing system IDZ 5369
• P&ID of the new system M-WR-1417-FSO2-11-09-001
• The detail drawings of the existing IGG GAG00530-A and B, GAG-01912-1
• The sketch drawing of new IGG
3.2 Specification and Datasheet
The specification and Data Sheet as list below will be attached in APPENDIX C.
• Design and fabrication of pressure vessels according to ASME VIII
: TOTAL Specification: GS-PVV-211(4)
• Welding of pressure containing piping and equipment
: TOTAL Specification: GS-PVV-611(4)
• Painting system P-05 2nd : TOTAL Specification: GS-COR-350(3)
• Inert Gas Generator System : By Manufacturer – KASHIWA
• HSE Instructions for CONTRACTORS : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
4. Procurement Strategy CONTRACTOR shall supply all required equipment and manpower for completing the fabrication work of new 2 sets of IGG. The packing and Transportation of fabricated parts shall be CONTRACTOR Scope. CONTRACTOR quotation shall be broken down the item and filled in the blank form as attached in APPENDIX A.
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 7
APPENDIX A
“Blank form for Quotation”
Location: FSO2, BONGKOT
1. Engineering Work Unit Q'ty Rate (Per Unit) MOD/DEMOB Total Cost Engineering Design Details Drawings
Engineering Dossier
2. Site Survey Qty Days Rate (Per Day) MOD/DEMOB Total Cost Surveyor
3. Materials Supply Qty Unit Rate (Per Unit) MOD/DEMOB Total CostMaterials Supply Painting Material
3. Prefabrication Work Qty Unit Rate (Per Unit) MOD/DEMOB Total CostFabrication work Inspection work Pressure testing workPainting work
4. Others Qty Unit Rate (Per Unit) MOD/DEMOB Total CostPacking Work Transportation Work
Note Charging Rate for Offshore Works Unit Rate (Per Unit) Standby Rate for BONGKOT Offshore (if any) Day Over time Rate (after 12 Hr working time) for BONGKOT Offshore (if any) Hour
MOB/DEMOB to BONGKOT Offshore (extra above quotation) Trip
Sub Total
Grand Total
Sub Total
Date:
Sub Total
Sub Total
Description
Sub Total
Attn: Khun Panisa K
To: PTT Exploration and Production PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED
CC : Chatchai /PDC-M
Quotation
Standard Form QuotationBREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM PRICE
WORK/Project Title: To Repair Inert Gas Generators Unit on FSO2
CONTARCTOR: ________________________
QUOTATION No. ___________________
WORK ref no.: WR-1417
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 8
APPENDIX B
“Modification Drawings”
PTTEP
BONGKOT ASSET
REQUEST FOR QUOTATION DOSSIER WR-1417
REV. A Feb. 27, 09
For Budgetary
PTT EXPLORATION AND PRODUCTION PUBLIC COMPANY LIMITED Page 9
APPENDIX C
“Specifications and Datasheets”
REVISION 1. 2. 3.
DATE : 30th. July. 2001
CHIEF OFSECTION :
CHECKER :
DRAWER :
INERT GAS GENERATOR SYSTEM
KASHIWA
Tsukuba Works,Design Dept.
Kashiwa Co.,Ltd
Project No. : W1370
Messrs:MODEC (PTTEP Bongkot FSO Unit)
Inert Gas Capacity:3,000 Nm3/hr
PAGE DRAWING NO. DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1-3 DESIGN SPECIFICATION
4-9A SUPPLY LIST
10 IDZ-5369 PIPING DIAGRAM
11 IFZ-1173 CONTROL TABLE
12-12A GAG-00530-A INERT GAS GENERATOR
13-13A IAW-325 DECK WATER SEAL & LEVEL SWITCH
14 GAG-9101261 DEMISTER VESSEL
15 PVB/KS-9708 P/V BREAKER
16-16A GAG-20421 F.O. PUMP UNIT
17-18 1043701 SECONDARY AIR FAN
19 GM410600 MOTOR FOR SECONDARY AIR FAN
20-41A O/SG XXXXX STARTER
42 MF-2277 PRIMARY AIR FAN
43-44 MPR-1212 BURNER
45 INTENTIONALLY BLANKED
46 Mp-2355 PILOT F.O. PUMP
47-50 INSTRUMENT FOR IGG UNIT
51 615 X CA 2001 EA I.G.G. MAIN VALVE
52 615 X CA 1826 EB PRESS. CONTROL VALVE
53 615 X CA 1826 EB EXHAUST VALVE
53A-53B 622 H CA 0127 EA COOLING SEA WATER VALVE
54 615 X GB 0999 E VENT VALVE
54A IGNV-H-200-250 DECK MAIN LINE NON-RETURN VALVE
54B 630C-SDT-A401 FLAME SCREEN
54C-54D STP-E20X EXPANSION JOINT
55-55A KSW-EJA110 DIFFERENTIAL PRESS. TRANSMITTER
56-57 A-0170-2001 PRESSURE SWITCH
58 IAI-5205 PRESSURE GAUGE
59 KH-38956-2 TEMP. METER
60 KG20-15A I/P CONVERTER
61 IAE-5195 Pt RESISTANCE BULB
62 IAV-1400 VACUUM BREAKER
63A-63B AW4000-02 FILTER REGULATOR
64A-64C HS012003 FLOW SENSOR
65-72 S-104067-A1 OXYGEN ANALYZER
73 M30X-001-00 PORTABLE OXYZEN METER OX-1C
74 A3-16224E PORTABLE COMBUSTIBLE METER NP-237H
75-78 IAP-5371 IGG MAIN PANEL
79-82A IAP-5373 IGG PANEL(NO.1 & NO.2)
83-101 ELECTRIC CONNECTION DIAGRAM
102-120 SPARE PART LIST
INSTALLTION METHOD
CONTENTS
1. Duty
1-1 Classification : SOLAS, ABS 1-2 Inert gas capacity : 3,000 Nm3/Hr 1-3 Inert gas discharge pressure. : 9.8 kPa (1000mmH2O) at main valve outlet 1-4 Inert gas discharge temperature. : 12℃ Above temp.of available cooling water. 1-5 Inert gas discharge dew point. : Saturated gas 1-6 Inert gas composition Carbon dioxide : Below 12-14 Vol % Carbon monoxide : Below 500 ppm % Oxygen : 2.0 - 4.0 Vol % Sulphur dioxide : Below 50 ppm Nitrogen and trace gas : Remainder
The inert gas will be saturated with water vapour at the inert gas generator discharge temperature and pressure.
1-7 Fuel oil For main and pilot burner : Marine Gas oil
(JIS K2204 OR ISO-F-DMA) 1-8 Cooling water for Generator : Sea water Cooling water supply pressure : 2 Kg/cm2 at IGG Cooling water temperature : 0 to 34℃ 1-9 Electric power source For motors : 440V AC 60Hz For control equipment : 220V AC 60Hz 1-10 Instrument air Control air supply pressure. : 6 to 9 Kg/cm2 The control air should be dry and oil free. 1-11 Ambient temperature : 0 to 45℃
2. Utility Requirements
2-1 Fuel oil consumption : max 253 Kg/hr at 2% O2
2-2 Electricity Secondary Air Fan : 30KW×2 sets Primary air Fan : 2.2KW×1set 3.9A Burner motor : 0.4KW×1set (2P) 0.9A Fuel oil pump : 0.4KW×2 sets (4P) 1.2A Fuel oil pump for pilot : 0.2KW×1 sets (4P) 0.55A Oxygen analyzer : 0.2KW Control equipments : 0.8KW 2-3 Cooling water consumption Cooling water for inert gas : 252 m3/Hr 2-4 Instrument Control air consumption : 4 Nm3/Hr
DESIGN SPECIFICATION
3. General description
Inert gas will be produced by the accuratly controlled combustion of fuel oil with air drawn from the atmosphere. The services of an operator is required during the start up period but will operate unattended thereafter. During operation, the equipment will be monitored by instruments and will shut down on system failure or mulfunction.
4. Equipment Description.
4-1 Combustion air system Air for combustion will be drawn from atmosphrer by an electorically driven positive displacement air fan, which will boost the combustion to required pressure to overcome the system resistance. 4-2 Fuel oil system Fuel is drawn from the storage tank by an electrically driven fuel oil pump.The fuel oil should flow to the pump section by gravity and maintain a positiv head. A relief line is provided to return excessive oil to the storage tank. The fuel oil system will be complete with oil strainer, pressure regurator, solenoid operated globe valve, pressure gauge, pressure switch.
4-3 Burner The rotary cup oil burner assembly is flange mounted on the combustion chamber and comprises pilot burner, ignition transformer phot cell flame detector, and visual sight ports. The flow of fuel oil to the main and pilot burners are controlled by solenoid operated valve during the system start up and shut down. The pilot burner is an oil pressure atomising burner, ignited by high voltage electric spark.
4-4 Combustion chamber Combustion chamber is manufactured from SUS316(JIS) stainless steel and it is coverd with seawater cooling jacket.
4-5 Cooling tower The combustion gas passes a cooling tower section where incorporates water spray nozzles and packed to cool and removing solids and sulphur. The combustion gas is cooled up to 12 ゚C above sea water temperature.
4-6 Demister The cooled inert gas passes through the demister element at thedemister vessel. its containning water droplets are removed, and led to the inert gas main line. The unit would remove 97 % droplets 5 micron size or greater. (Water content : max. 68.5g/m3 for reference)
4-7 Cooling water system Cooling seawater will be supplied by independent seawater pump to spray nozzle of combustion chamber via water jacket and spray nozzle of cooling tower for cooling the inert gas. The drain water is discharged to overboard via water seal system.
4-8 Inert gas outlet The control valves are provided on inert gas outlet. The pressure control valve(PV-101) is provided on IGG outlet for maintain the combustion pressure constantly. Exhaust valve(PV-103) is used to relief the inert gas to atmosphere automatically when the pressure rises above set pressure and inert gas capacity is controled by IG main line pressure . The other one(PV-102) is used to control the inert gas supply, and the valves is controlled automatically (open / close). In case of failure or malfunction of the system, this valve will be closed automatically. 4-9 Oxygen analyze system The oxygen analyzer is provided to monitor high oxygen contents of the inert gas. The oxygen contents will be recorded and indicated in the c.o.c. If the high oxygen contents occur, then alarms will be given
4-10 Pressure Vacuum Breaker Liquid filled type P/V breaker is fitted to the inert gas main line on the deck to protect the cargo oil tanks from abnormal pressure in the tanks caused by miss-operation during cargo handing or other condition.
4-11 I.G.G. panel The IGG panel is mounted on the IGG mounting base. Panel will be fabricated from carbon steel plate, and push buttons, running/alarms lights and selector switch will be provided on the front of the panel.
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
IGG UNIT 0 2
< I.G.G. PANEL - with Body > 0 1OI-507 O2 INDICATOR 0 1TI-511 TEMP INDICATOR (JACKET COOL WATER) 0 1TI-512 TEMP INDICATOR (IG GAS TEMP) 0 1
SSR-3.5 MAIN BURNER 0 1 SSR-3.5BURNER MOTOR 0 1 440V 60HZ 0.4KW 2PPILOT BURNER 0 1FLAME DETECTOR 0 1IGNITOR 0 1SPRAY NOZZLE 0 1
LVG-207 LEVEL GAUGE 0 1LVS-204 LEVEL SWITCH 0 1TI-402 THERMO METER (JACKET WATER) 0 1TI-404 THERMO METER (GAS COOLING WATER) 0 1TI-405 THERMO METER (DRAIN) 0 1
FPR-204 RELIEF VALVE (OIL PRESS.ADJ.VALVE) 0 1PI-211 PRESS.GAUGE (PRIMARY AIR) 0 1PI-221 PRESS.GAUGE (SECONDARY AIR) 0 1PI-202 PRESS.GAUGE (PILOT BURNER F.O.) 0 1PI-203 PRESS.GAUGE (MAIN BURNER F.O.) 0 1PI-205 PRESS.GAUGE (JACKET COOL WATER) 0 1PI-206 PRESS.GAUGE (GAS COOLING WATER) 0 1PS-311 PRESS. SWITCH (PRIMARY AIR) 0 1PS-312 PRESS. SWITCH (SECONDARY AIR) 0 1PS-303 PRESS. SWITCH (MAIN BURNER F.O.) 0 1PS-304 PRESS.SWITCH (JACKET COOL WATER - LOW) 0 1PS-305 PRESS. SWITCH (GAS COOLING WATER) 0 1PS-500 PRESS. SWITCH (JACKET COOL WATER - HIGH) 0 1TIA-502 Pt RESISTANCE BULB (JACKET WATER) 0 1
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
SHO
WN
ON
1 (O
NE
) IG
G U
NIT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
SV-001 SOLENOID VALVE (PILOT BURNER F.O.) 0 1SV-002 SOLENOID VALVE (MAIN BURNER F.O.) 0 2MV-107 MANUAL COCK (PILOT BURNER F.O.- INLET) 0 1MV-108 MANUAL COCK (MAIN BURNER F.O.) 0 2MV-109 MANUAL COCK (MAIN BURNER F.O.) 0 1MV-110 MANUAL COCK (PILOT BURNER F.O. - OUTLET) 0 1
R408 AIR / OIL FLOW CONTROL MOTOR 0 1R231 OIL-FLOW REGULATOR 0 1R247 CHECK VALVE 0 1FI-006 OIL-FLOW METER 0 1FP-003 PILOT F.O. PUMP 0 1 GFH-V3L
FPM-003 MOTOR FOR PILOT F.O. PUMP 0 1 440V 60HZ 0.2KW 2PSP-304 SPARY NOZZLE 0 1PR-305 HILEX 0 1
SHO
WN
ON
1 (O
NE
) IG
G U
NIT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
AB-201 No.1 PRIMARY AIR FAN 0 1ABM-202 MOTOR FOR No.1 PRIMARY AIR FAN 0 1 440V 60HZ 2.2KW 2P
FJ-201 EXPANSION JOINT (No.1 PRIMARY FAN) 0 1 5K-65AFJ-202 EXPANSION JOINT (No.1 PRIMARY AIR LINE) 0 1 5K-65AFJ-203 EXPANSION JOINT (No.1 PRIMARY FAN SUCTION LINE) 0 1 5K-250A
PBV-201 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE (No.1 PRIM. FAN DEL.V.) 0 1 5K-65ASAV-001 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE 0 1 5K-250AAB-301 No.2 PRIMARY AIR FAN 0 1
ABM-302 MOTOR FOR No.2 PRIMARY AIR FAN 0 1 440V 60HZ 2.2KW 2PFJ-301 EXPANSION JOINT (No.2 PRIMARY FAN) 0 1 5K-65AFJ-302 EXPANSION JOINT (No.2 PRIMARY AIR LINE) 0 1 5K-65AFJ-303 EXPANSION JOINT (No.2 PRIMARY FAN SUCTION LINE) 0 1 5K-250A
PBV-301 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE (No.2 PRIM. FAN DEL.V.) 0 1 5K-65ASAV-002 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE 0 1 5K-250A
DM01 DEMISTER ( FOR No.1 IGG UNIT ) 0 1MBV-050 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE 0 1
DM02 DEMISTER ( FOR No.2 IGG UNIT ) 0 1MBV-060 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE 0 1
1312 AIR HEADER 0 1MV-111 MANUAL VALVE 0 1PRV-103 PRESS.REGULATOR (CONTROL AIR) 0 1PRV-104 PRESS.REGULATOR (CONTROL AIR) 0 1
PI-204 PRESS.GAUGE (CONTROL AIR) 0 1PS-302 PRESS. SWITCH (CONTROL AIR) 0 1
< SEA WATER INLET LINE >V-307 STOP VALVE 0 2 125A For No. 1 IGG UNIT & No. 2 IGG UNITV-308 STOP VALVE 0 2 100A For No. 1 IGG UNIT & No. 2 IGG UNIT
CO
MM
ON
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
< F.O. PUMP UNIT > 0 1ST-101 STRAINER 0 1FP-001 NO.1 F.O. PUMP 0 1FP-002 NO.2 F.O. PUMP 0 1
MV-103 MANUAL COCK (NO.1 F.O.PUMP SUCTION) 0 1MV-104 MANUAL COCK (NO.2 F.O.PUMP SUCTION) 0 1FPM-001 MOTOR FOR NO.1 F.O. PUMP 0 1 440V 60HZ 0.4KW 6PFPM-002 MOTOR FOR NO.2 F.O. PUMP 0 1 440V 60HZ 0.4KW 6PMV-105 MANUAL COCK (NO.1 F.O.PUMP DELIV) 0 1MV-106 MANUAL COCK (NO.2 F.O.PUMP DELIV) 0 1PI-006 PRESS. GAUGE 0 2
FOV-001 MANUAL GLOBE VALVE 0 1 JIS5K-20AFOV-002 MANUAL GLOBE VALVE 0 1 JIS5K-20A
〈 SECONDARY AIR FAN 〉AB-101 NO.1 SECONDARY AIR FAN 0 1AB-102 NO.2 SECONDARY AIR FAN 0 1
ABM-101 MOTOR FOR NO.1 SECONDARY AIR FAN 0 1 440V 60HZ 30KW 2PABM-102 MOTOR FOR NO.2 SECONDARY AIR FAN 0 1 440V 60HZ 30KW 2P
FJ-101 EXPANSION JOINT (NO.1 FAN) 0 1 5K-250AFJ-102 EXPANSION JOINT (NO.2 FAN) 0 1 5K-250AFJ-103 EXPANSION JOINT (NO.1 SECONDARY AIR LINE) 0 1 5K-250AFJ-104 EXPANSION JOINT (NO.2 SECONDARY AIR LINE) 0 1 5K-250A
MBV-101 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE (NO.1 FAN DELV) 0 1MBV-102 MANUAL BUTTERFLY VALVE (NO.2 FAN DELV) 0 1
CO
MM
ON
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
〈 INERT GAS LINE 〉PV-101 PRESS. CONT VALVE 0 1 5K-250ASV-101 SOLENOID VALVE 0 1
LS-1/LS-2 LIMIT SWITCH 0 2PV-102 IG MAIN VALVE 0 1 5K-250ASV-102 SOLENOID VALVE 0 1
LS-3/LS-4 LIMIT SWITCH 0 2PV-103 EXHAUST VALVE 0 1 5K-200ASV-103 SOLENOID VALVE 0 1
LS-5/LS-6 LIMIT SWITCH 0 2PV-104 COOLING SEA WATER INLET VALVE 0 1 10 K-200A
LS-7/LS-8 LIMIT SWITCH 0 2SV-104 SOLENOID VALVE 0 1PT-004 PRESS.TRANSMITTER 0 1TI-403 THERMO METER (IG GAS) 0 1
TIA-503 Pt RESISTANCE BULB (IG GAS) 0 1PI-207 PRESS.GAUGE (IG GAS) 0 1PT-005 PRESS. TRANSMITTER 0 1
< PUMP ROOM ENTRANCE >PS31 PRESS. SWITCH (DK MAIN PRESS.) 0 1
DPT-507 PRESS. TRANSMITTER (DK MAIN PRESS.) 0 1PI-300 PRESS. INDICATOR (DK MAIN PRESS.) 0 1
0800 O2 ANALYZER UNIT 0 1with STANDARD GAS BOTTLE FOR O2 METER
CO
MM
ON
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
0200 DECK WATER SEAL 0 1LVS-500 LEVEL SWITCH (DECK WATER SEAL) 0 1
0915 SHORT PIPE FOR FLOW SENSOR 0 10916 TERMINAL BOX FOR FLOW SENSOR 0 10917 DECK SEAL FEED WATER FLOW SENSOR 0 1 0-0.4MPa1305 DECK SEAL FEED WATER NON-RETURN VALVE 0 11306 DECK SEAL FEED WATER VALVE 0 1
NRV-104 NON-RETURN VALVE 0 1 JIS 5K-250A
MV-118 MANUAL VALVE (DK MAIN PRESS. SAMPLE) 0 1MV-119 MANUAL VALVE (DK MAIN PRESS. SAMPLE) 0 1
1308 VACUUM BREAKER 0 10508 VENT VALVE 0 1 JIS 5K-50A0509 FLAME SCREEN 0 1
0600 P/V BREAKER 0 1
〈DRAIN LINE〉DV-001 IGG DRAIN DISCHARGE VALVE 0 1 300A
0703 DECK WATER SEAL OVERBOARD DRAIN VALVE 0 1 50ADV-002 DEMISTER DRAIN DISCHARGE VALVE 0 1 40A
〈 I.G.G. MAIN PANEL - C.C.R. > 0 1
RECORDER (DK MAIN PRESS./O2 CONTENT) 0 1INTRINSICALLY BARRIER (DK MAIN PRESS) 0 1I.S. RELAY 0 2
CO
MM
ON
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
PARTS SUPPLY LISTK : Kashiwa D : Dockyard
Q'ty DESCRIPTIONK D
ITEMSSUPPLY
BYNO.
ITEM
〈STARTER PANEL〉- GROUP STARTER 0 1No.1 F.O.PUMPNo.2 F.O.PUMPNo.1 PRIMARY AIR FANNo.2 PRIMARY AIR FANNo.1 SECONDARY AIR FAN No.2 SECONDARY AIR FAN
〈ACCESSORIES〉1322 PORTABLE COMBUSTION GAS DETECTOR 0 2
with STANDERD GAS BOTTLE FOR GAS DETECTOR1321 PORTTABLE OXYGEN METER 0 2
SPARE PARTS 0 1
CO
MM
ON
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
NOTE IGG NO.1 NO.2O : INDIVIDUALLY A : AUTO.CONTROL LOCAL INTERLOCKC : GROUP A/M : AUTO.&MANUAL(REMOTE) CONTROL
FO : FULL OPEN OP : OPEN ST : SHUT
SP : STOPPB : PUSH BUTTON SWITCH CS : CHANGE OVER SWITCHRE : RECORDER WITH INDICATORIG : INERT GASNAV: NAVIGATIONGF : GAS FREE
NO. TAG. RECEIVER NORMAL ALARMNO. RANGE CONDITION CONDITION
1 SYSTEM MODE SELECT IG-NAV-GF CS O O O2 NO.1/NO.2 IGG UNIT SELECT CS O3 IGG START & STOP O PB O PB O4 INERT GAS SUPPLY SWITCH PB OP WHEN PUSH START BUTTON
5 EMERGENCY STOP PB PB PB6 PRIMARY AIR FAN AB 201 ABNORMAL STOP O C O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST7 PRIMARY AIR PRESS. PS 311 0-30 kPa 18-23 kPa LOW (13 kPa) O O O
SECONDARY AIR FAN AB 101 ABNORMAL STOP CS O C O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST NO.1 OR NO.2 SELECT(NO1. & NO2) AB 102
9 SECONDARY AIR PRESSURE PS 312 0-30 kPa 10-15 kPa LOW (7 kPa) C O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST10 BURNER MOTOR ABNORMAL STOP C O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST11 PILOT F.O. PUMP ABNORMAL STOP C O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST
FUEL OIL PUMP FP 001 ABNORMAL STOP CS O C O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST NO.1 OR NO.2 SELECT(NO1. & NO2) FP 002
13 FUEL OIL PRES. FOR PILOT PI 202 0-1.5 MPa 0.7 MPa O14 FUEL OIL PRES. FOR MAIN PS 303 0-1.5 MPa 0.3 MPa LOW (0.18 MPa) C O O O15 COOL.S.W.PUMP ABNORMAL STOP O O O O16 IGNITOR O O17 FLAME DETECTOR FAILURE O O O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST18 INERT GAS AVAILABLE O O O19 ELECTRIC SOURCE FAILURE O O O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST ST20 CONTROL AIR PRESS. PS 302 0 - 1.5MPa 0.6 - 0.9MPa 0.4MPa and below O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST21 COOL. S. W. PRESS. PS 305 0 - 0.5MPa 0.2MPa 0.08 MPa O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST22 COOL. S. W. TEMP. TI 404 0-100℃ O23 GENERATOR DRAIN LEVEL LVS 204 HIGH O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST ST SP24 GENERATOR DRAIN TEMP. TI 405 0-100℃ O25 IGG CONTROL PRESS. PT 004 0-30KPa 10kPa A/M O O
I.G. MAIN LINE PT 005 0-30KPa 9kPa A/M OPRESSUREI. G. MAIN LINE 0 - 10 % LESS THAN 8% and ABOVE RE O O O O O ST OPOXYGEN CONTENT OA O2 5 %I. G. MAIN LINE 0 -100 LESS THAN 65 ℃ and ABOVE O O O O O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP STTEMP. TIA 503 ℃ 60 ℃
29 JACKET COOLING W. TEMP. TIA502 0-100℃ ditto HIGH (ditto) C O O O O O30 JACKET COOLING W. PRESS. PS500 0-0.5 MPa 0.15 MPa HIGH (0.3 MPa) O O O SP SP SP OP ST OP ST ST SP31 JACKET COOLING W. PRESS. PS 304 0-0.5 MPa 0.15 MPa LOW (0.08 MPa) C O O O32 DECK SEAL SEAL W. LEVEL LVS 1 LOW O O O33 DECK SEAL FEED W. FLOW LF1 1m3/h LOW (0.6 m3/h) O O O
DPT HIGH 14 kPa O C C507 LOW 2 kPa O C C
EXT. LOW 1 kPa O O O SP35 PRESS,CONTROL VALVE PV 101 A/M O O O O O FO/OP/ST36 I.G. MAIN VALVE PV 102 A O O O O O FO.ST37 EXHAUST VALVE PV 103 A/M O O O O O FO/OP/ST38 COOL.S.W.VALVE PV 104 A O O O O O FO.ST
BUZZER STOP BSPB PB PB
FLICKER STOP FSPB PB PB
TSLAMP & BUZZER TEST PB PB PB
REVISION : 1. 26th.Sep.2001 By ABS COMMENT ENGINEERING DEPT.
IGG-CT-MODEC REVISION : 2. CONTROL TABLE DWG. NO. IFZ - 1173 - 1 KASHIWA CO., LTD.
IGG PANEL(MACHINE SIDE.)
IGG PANEL(MACHINE SIDE.)
REI.G. DECK MAIN LINE PRESS.34
MAIN PANEL(C.C.R.)
ALA
RM
(A
UD
IBLE &
VIS
UA
L)
27
-10to25kPa7 - 8 kPa
40
41
39
28
IND
ICA
TIO
N
26
8
12
OP
ER
AT
ION
GA
UG
E IN
DIC
AT
ION
LAM
P IN
DIC
AT
ION
ALA
RM
(A
UD
IBLE &
VIS
UA
L)
PR
IMA
RY
AIR
FA
N
SEC
ON
DA
RY
AIR
FA
N 1
&2
OP
ER
AT
ION
GA
UG
E IN
DIC
AT
ION
LAM
P IN
DIC
AT
ION
OP
ER
AT
ION
GA
UG
E IN
DIC
AT
ION
LAM
P IN
DIC
AT
ION
ALA
RM
(A
UD
IBLE &
VIS
UA
L)
OP
ER
AT
ION
MA
IN F
UEL O
IL P
UM
P 1
&2
PR
ES
SU
RE
CO
NT
RO
L V
ALV
E(P
V-1
01)
IG M
AIN
VA
LV
E(P
V-1
02)
EX
HA
ST
VA
LV
E(P
V-1
03)
FU
EL O
IL S
OLEN
OID
V.(M
AIN
)(S
V-0
02)
CO
OL.S
.W. V
ALV
E(P
V-1
04)
CA
RG
O O
IL P
UM
P
CO
OL. S
. W
. P
UM
P
DATE:02/02/14
TITLE
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONDRAW.NO. SHEET NO.O/SG13001 01
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONSTARTER
1. GENERAL
1-1 OWNER : PTTEP
1-2 MESSRS : KASHIWA CO.,LTD.
1-3 SHIPYARD : YAMTAI RAFFLES SHIPYARD CO.,LTD.
1-4 SHIP NO. : FSO (W1370)
1-5 ORDER NO. : 01-4587-02
1-6 DELIVERY : 2001-11-15
1-7 CLASSIFICATION : ABS
1-8 AMBIENT TEMP : 50℃
1-9 POWER SOURCE : AC440V 3φ 60Hz
1-10 CONTROL SOURCE : AC220V 1φ
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2. PAINT COLOR (INNER MAKER'S STANDARD)
2-1 GSP(CENTRAL) :
2-2 GSP(LOCAL) : 2.5 Y 8/2(GLOSSY) 1 SET
2-3 ST(INDEPENDENT) :
2-4 RPB :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. OVERLOAD PROTECTOR
THERMAL TYPE, THREE(3) PHASE WITH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION (INTERNAL RESETTING SYSTEM , SETTING VALUE IS EQUAL TO A RATED CURRENT VALUE.)-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
4-1 GSP(CENTRAL) : PLUGIN TYPE :
4-2 GSP(LOCAL) : FRONT TYPE : XS100NB
4-3 SHUNT COIL :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5. COLOR PLATE OF EMERG STOP & PREF TRIP (90x6x2)
5-1 EMERGENCY STOP (ABOVE THE NAME PLATE) :
5-2 PREFERENCE TRIP (BELOW THE NAME PLATE) :
5-3 SEQUENTIAL START :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. NAME PLATE
6-1 MATERIAL : METHACRYLATE
6-2 LETTER : ENGLISH : GENERAL : BLACK LETTER & WHITE GROUND
: CAUTION : RED LETTER & WHITE GROUND
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. INTERNAL WIRING
7-1 MAIN CIRCUIT : 660V SCP
7-2 CONT CIRCUIT(0.75mm2,1.25mm2) : 660V SCP ,600V STYLE1015
7-3 EARTH : GREEN & YELLOW(ZEBRA)
7-4 COLOR OF BUS BAR : R.U.Y : RED
(PARTIALLY) S.V.Z : WHITE
T.W.X : BLUE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8. CABLE LEAD-IN : LOWER PORTION : JIS GLAND
UPPER PORTION : JIS GLAND
REAR SURFACE : COAMING
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9. SIGNAL LAMP : BA9S/13 6.3V 1W
10. FUSE : CELLO LITE UC1
11. EARTHING(Tr 2ND) : WITHOUT
12. IP GRADE : REFER TO ATTACHED “STARTER LIST O/S A1”( SHEET NO FROM 021 )
INERT GAS GENERATOR SYSTEM
KASHIWA
Tsukuba Works,Design Dept.
Kashiwa Co.,Ltd
Project No.: W1370
Messrs:MODEC (PTTEP Bongkot FSO Unit)
ELECTRIC
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NORMAL RUN POST-PURGE10sec 3sec 5sec 5sec 5min 20sec 1min
CO
OLS
.W.P
UM
P S
TA
RT
IGG
STA
RT
FLA
ME
ON
IG S
UP
PLY
IGG
STO
P
COOLING SEA WATERPUMP
STOP
STOP
STOP
OFF
STOPSOLENOID VALVEFOR PILOT BURNER OFF
SORENOID VALVEFOR MAIN BURNER SHUT SHUT
STOP
LOW
SHUT SHUT
SHUT OPEN SHUT
OPEN CONTROL OPEN
OPEN
ON
ON
OPEN
IG MAIN VALVE
EXHAUST VALVE
HIGH POSITION
RUN
AIL/OIL CONTROL MOTOR
RUN
1min
RUN
RUN
ON
RUN
SECONDARY AIR FAN
TIME CHART FOR IGG SYSTEM
MAIN FUEL OIL PUMP
IGNITER
PILOT FUEL OIL PUMP
PRE-PURGE
PRIMARY AIR FAN
RUN
CONTROL
THIS VALVE IS 'SHUT' AT THE CONDITIONS OF 'DRAIN LEVEL HIGH' , 'JACKET W. PRESS. HIGH' , OR 'ELE. SUPPLY STOP'
FLAME EYE
BURNER MOTOR
COOLING SEA WATER VALVE
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
LOW POSITION
INERT GAS GENERATOR SYSTEM
KASHIWA
Tsukuba Works,Design Dept.
Kashiwa Co.,Ltd
Project No. : W1370
Messrs:MODEC (PTTEP Bongkot FSO Unit)
SPARE PARTS LIST
φ
Exploration & Production
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PIPING VALVES VESSELS
GS EP PVV 211
Design and fabrication of pressure vessels according to ASME VIII
04 10/07 Revision crossed references
03 10/06 General review
02 10/05 Addition of “EP” root to GS identification
01 10/03 General review – Change of Group name and logo
00 02/01 First issue
Rev. Date Notes
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 2/44
Contents
1. Scope .......................................................................................................................5
2. Reference documents.............................................................................................5
3. Manufacturer's responsibility ................................................................................9
4. Design Data .............................................................................................................9 4.1 Pressures...........................................................................................................................9 4.2 Temperatures ....................................................................................................................9 4.3 Thermal insulation .............................................................................................................9 4.4 Combination units ............................................................................................................10 4.5 Corrosion allowance ........................................................................................................10 4.6 Wind.................................................................................................................................10 4.7 Earthquake ......................................................................................................................11 4.8 Transport .........................................................................................................................11
5. Design rules...........................................................................................................11 5.1 General ............................................................................................................................11 5.2 Combinations of loads .....................................................................................................11 5.3 Local loads.......................................................................................................................12 5.4 Maximum allowable stresses...........................................................................................13 5.5 Clad vessels ....................................................................................................................13 5.6 Deflection.........................................................................................................................13 5.7 Minimum thicknesses ......................................................................................................13
6. Calculation notes ..................................................................................................16
7. Materials.................................................................................................................16 7.1 Selection of materials ......................................................................................................16 7.2 Equivalent materials ........................................................................................................18 7.3 Weldability of C-Mn steels ...............................................................................................19 7.4 Clad vessels ....................................................................................................................19 7.5 Flange gaskets and gasket contact faces........................................................................19 7.6 Bolting..............................................................................................................................19 7.7 Suborders of materials.....................................................................................................20
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 3/44
8. Rules of construction ...........................................................................................20 8.1 Shell and heads welded joints number ............................................................................20 8.2 Welded joint layout ..........................................................................................................20 8.3 Type of welded joints .......................................................................................................21 8.4 Heads ..............................................................................................................................21 8.5 Transitions .......................................................................................................................21 8.6 Body flanges ....................................................................................................................21 8.7 Supports ..........................................................................................................................22 8.8 Connections - Nozzles and Manholes .............................................................................22 8.9 Other attachments to vessel walls ...................................................................................25 8.10 Lifting devices ..................................................................................................................26 8.11 Internals ...........................................................................................................................27
9. Fabrication.............................................................................................................27 9.1 General ............................................................................................................................27 9.2 Cutting .............................................................................................................................27 9.3 Forming............................................................................................................................27 9.4 Welding............................................................................................................................27 9.5 Post-weld heat treatment.................................................................................................29 9.6 Production test pieces .....................................................................................................30
10. Pressure tests .......................................................................................................31 10.1 Shop tests........................................................................................................................31 10.2 Testing procedure............................................................................................................31 10.3 Temperature and quality of the test water .......................................................................31
11. Inspection and quality assurance........................................................................32 11.1 General ............................................................................................................................32 11.2 Quality Assurance system ...............................................................................................32 11.3 Quality plan......................................................................................................................32 11.4 Material verification, inspection, and testing ....................................................................32 11.5 Welding inspection...........................................................................................................33 11.6 Dimensional check...........................................................................................................35
12. Nameplate ..............................................................................................................35
13. Preparation for shipment......................................................................................35 13.1 General ............................................................................................................................35
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 4/44
13.2 Particular requirements....................................................................................................36 13.3 Packing ............................................................................................................................36
14. Fittings and spare parts........................................................................................37 14.1 Fittings .............................................................................................................................37 14.2 Spare parts ......................................................................................................................37
15. Documentation ......................................................................................................37 15.1 Language and format of documents ................................................................................37 15.2 Detail of documents to be submitted for review...............................................................37 15.3 Manufacturer data report .................................................................................................39
Appendix 1 Nozzle loads..........................................................................................40
Appendix 2 Manufacturer design report summary................................................43
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 5/44
1. Scope This General Specification covers COMPANY practices and minimum requirements for the engineering design, selection of materials, fabrication, inspection and testing of fusion welded unfired pressure vessels conforming in definition to the Code mentioned in section 2 of this specification.
For the purpose of this specification, the name “pressure vessels” includes all nozzles up to the flange facing of the first flange, blind flanges of manways, and blind flanges of any other nozzles which are part of the supply as shown on the relevant datasheet. It also includes vessel’s supports (e.g., skirts with base rings, legs, saddles, etc.), as well as lifting lugs and trunnions.
In this specification, high-pressure vessels are those designed for a coincident pressure and temperature equal to or greater than class 600 rating as defined per ASME B 16.5.
Any vessel in H2S service subject to the NACE MR 01.75/ ISO 15156 requirements shall be considered in “lethal service” as defined in the Code.
2. Reference documents The reference documents listed below form an integral part of this General Specification. Unless otherwise stipulated, the applicable version of these documents, including relevant appendices and supplements, is the latest revision published at the EFFECTIVE DATE of the CONTRACT.
Pressure vessels covered by this specification shall be designed, engineered, and built in accordance with the latest revisions issued at the date of the call for tender of the following documents listed hereafter.
Any divergence between any of the Contractual Reference Documents, or between this specification and any other Contractual Reference Document, shall be reported to the COMPANY Technology Division for decision. In such a case, and unless otherwise agreed or decided by the COMPANY Technology Division, it is understood that the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Exceptions to, or deviations from this specification are not permitted unless previously accepted in writing by the COMPANY Technology Division. For this purpose, Manufacturer's requests for substitution or change of any kind shall be complete with all pertinent information required for the COMPANY Technology Division assessment.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 6/44
Standards
Reference Title
MSS SP 6 Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of Pipe Flanges and Connecting-End Flanges of Valves and Fittings
ISO 5579 Non-destructive testing -- Radiographic examination of metallic materials by X- and gamma rays -- Basic rules
EN 10204 Metallic Products - Type of inspection documents
EN 584-1 Industrial radiographic film. Classification of film systems for industrial radiography
NACE MR 01.75/ ISO 15156
Material for Use in H2S-containing Environments in Oil and Gas Production
Professional Documents
Reference Title
WRC 107 and 297 Welding Research Council: Bulletin 107 and 297
Regulations If the country of installation has its own regulation, it must be applied wherever more stringent than the Code.
Any Construction Code or Government Regulations, which may be listed in the Project Specifications, in the requisition or in the Purchase Order, if any, shall have precedence except where this Specification is more stringent.
Reference Title
Not applicable
Codes The basic code is the ASME (Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code), Section VIII, Division 1.
Alternatively, Division 2 may be specified by the Engineering Company in the particular specifications of the vessel, or may be proposed by the Manufacturer. In such a case, pressure vessels must be stamped, which includes the required User Design Specifications to be issued by the Engineering Company and approved by a Registered Professional Engineer (RPE). This RPE approval must be obtained prior to any Manufacturer’s design activity of the related vessels.
The basic code is referenced to as "the Code" in the present document.
Boilers (unfired) covered by this specification must comply with the ASME code, Section VIII or Section I.
The use of Code Cases related to any applicable ASME code is not permitted. Exceptions to this rule may be submitted for consideration to the COMPANY Technology Division on a case-by-case basis only, and prior to any design activity.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 7/44
Reference Title ASCE 7-95 Minimum design loads for buildings and other structures UBC Uniform Building Code: Volume 2 Wind And Earthquake AISC Manual of Steel Construction ASME VIII div. 1 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASME VIII div. 2 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
ASME Section II Materials specification
ASME Section IX Welding and brazing qualifications
ASME Section V Non-destructive examination
ASME B 1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads
ASME B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and flanged fittings (NPS ½ through NPS 24)
ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B 16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B 16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges – Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and Jacketed
ASME B 16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B 16.25 Buttwelding Ends
ASME B 16.47 Large diameter steel flanges (NPS 26 Through NPS 60)
ASME B 16.30 Unfired pressure vessel flange dimensions
ASME B 36.10M Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B 46.1 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay)
ASTM E 1815 Standard Test Method for Classification of Film Systems for Industrial Radiography
PD 5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
Other documents
Reference Title
Not applicable
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 8/44
Total General Specifications
Reference Title
GS EP COR 350 External protection of off-shore and coastal structures and equipment by painting
GS EP COR 352 Internal protection of equipment by painting
GS EP COR 354 External protection of onshore structures and equipment by painting
GS EP ECP 103 Process sizing criteria
GS EP PVV 202 Standard drawings for accessories and equipment of vessels
GS EP PVV 611 Welding of pressure containing piping and equipment
GS EP PVV 771 Thermal insulation (hot service)
GS EP PVV 772 Thermal insulation (cold service)
GS EP PVV 773 Thermal insulation (cyclic service)
SD EP PVV 201 * Tolerances of pressure vessels
SD EP PVV 202 * Horizontal tanks, heads with large knuckle radius
SD EP PVV 203 * Horizontal tanks, elliptical heads
SD EP PVV 204 * Lifting lugs
SD EP PVV 205 * Anchor lugs and base rings of vertical vessels
SD EP PVV 206 * Saddles for horizontal containers, diameter 350 to 550 mm
SD EP PVV 207 * Saddles welded for horizontal tanks
SD EP PVV 208 * Standard equipment of column skirts
SD EP PVV 209 * Legs for small vessels
SD EP PVV 210 * Nozzle designation
SD EP PVV 211 * Minimum nozzle thickness
SD EP PVV 212 * Nozzles less than 2" in diameter
SD EP PVV 213 * Protruding length and bolt holes of nozzles
SD EP PVV 214 * Vertical manhole with davit (WN flange)
SD EP PVV 215 * Vertical manhole with davit (SO flange)
SD EP PVV 216 * Horizontal manhole with davit (WN flange)
SD EP PVV 217 * Horizontal manhole with davit (SO flange)
SD EP PVV 218 * Hinged manhole (WN flange)
SD EP PVV 219 * Hinged manhole (SO flange)
SD EP PVV 220 * Handles and rungs for manholes
SD EP PVV 221 * Vortex Breaker
SD EP PVV 222 * Deflector on steam inlet
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 9/44
Reference Title
SD EP PVV 223 * Name Plates for vessels
SD EP PVV 224 * Earthing plate
SD EP PVV 225 * Monorail davit
SD EP PVV 230 * Insulation supports on vertical vessels
SD EP PVV 231 * Insulation supports on horizontal vessels
SD EP PVV 232 * Welding of cladded vessels
SD EP PVV 233 * Coating of nozzles
SD EP PVV 234 * Weld deposits on RTJ flange facings * (see GS EP PVV 202)
3. Manufacturer's responsibility This specification together with the particular specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Manufacturer from his responsibility, fulfilment of his duties, guarantee and/or liabilities, nor does the COMPANY, by any acceptance or approval, assume any responsibility for the conformance of the vessels to the requirements of the Code and/or of the Governing Authority.
4. Design Data
4.1 Pressures
4.1.1 General Design pressures are shown on the relevant pressure vessel mechanical data sheets that shall be issued by the Engineering Company. These pressure values are meant at the top of the vessels in their final operating positions, unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
4.1.2 Operation under partial vacuum If the internal pressure is 0.35 bar or less (absolute pressure), the vessel shall be designed for full vacuum. In all other cases, the vessel shall be designed for the maximum external pressure plus a margin of 0.15 bar.
4.2 Temperatures The Manufacturer shall check impact test requirements of the Code at the minimum design metal temperature. Unless otherwise specified, this temperature value shall be taken equal to the minimum design temperature as shown on the data sheet. A unique minimum design metal temperature shall be used for the complete vessel.
4.3 Thermal insulation Thermal insulation must be provided either required by the process studies or for personnel protection (although protection by physical barriers such as stainless steel open mesh guards or protective metal sheeting/screens shall be preferred whenever possible). Any required thermal insulation shall comply with the following COMPANY specifications, as appropriate: GS EP PVV 771, GS EP PVV 772, GS EP PVV 773. Surfaces shall be appropriately protected
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 10/44
in accordance with GS EP COR 350 or GS EP COR 350 before installation of thermal insulation.
4.3.1 Protection of personnel Protection of the personnel by physical barriers such as stainless steel open mesh guards or protective metal sheeting/screens must be provided on uninsulated equipment when the service temperature thereof is over 70°C. The minimum distance between protection and equipment shall be 50mm. This protection shall also apply to cold equipment, which might be a danger to the operators.
4.4 Combination units The partition between two independent chambers of a combination unit shall be designed to withstand the design pressure and temperature of any chamber whilst the adjacent chamber is under atmospheric pressure and temperature.
Unless otherwise authorised in writing by the COMPANY, design based on the differential pressure is not permitted.
4.5 Corrosion allowance Additional thickness shall be provided for the corrosion allowance specified in the vessel data sheet.
Corrosion allowance for nozzles and manholes shall be at least equal to that specified for the vessel shell. No corrosion allowance is required on gasket face of flanges.
Corrosion allowance for internals shall be as specified in section 5.7.2 and table 5.7 of this specification
In the particular case of nozzle protrusion inside vessels, the corrosion allowance applies to both sides of the nozzle.
4.6 Wind
4.6.1 Applicable code The applicable code is ASCE 7-95 "Minimum design loads for buildings and other structures", which must be applied as design method. Alternatively, the code UBC (Uniform Building Code) volume 2 (wind and earthquake) may be used.
In addition to the static calculations, calculations taking account of dynamic effects must be carried out for all vertical vessels, such as vertical drums, columns, stacks, etc. when the slenderness ratio is greater than 5.
However, in the case of very slender or special vessels, the COMPANY and/or the Engineering Company may require that the Manufacturer furnish calculations under dynamic conditions based on the references of the Code or on other approved methods.
4.6.2 Design data All data required for wind calculation shall be specified by the Engineering Company in the vessel requisition.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 11/44
4.7 Earthquake The stability of vessels shall be checked for the operating conditions as defined in table 5.2.
4.7.1 Applicable code The applicable code is ASCE 7-95 "Minimum design loads for buildings and other structures". It must be applied as design method. Alternatively, the code UBC (Uniform Building Code) volume 2 (wind and earthquake) may be used.
4.7.2 Design data All data required for earthquake calculation shall be specified by the Engineering Company in the vessel requisition.
4.8 Transport Design data (acceleration values) shall be specified by the Engineering Company in the vessel requisition. Except otherwise specified in the requisition, the following shall apply:
• The acceleration force shall be 0.8 g in any direction during sea transportation. Where the equipment is a not adequate, bracket for attaching sea fastenings shall be provided
• All equipment shall be capable of withstanding loads during road transport of 0.3 g longitudinally and 0.1 g in the vertical and transverse directions.
5. Design rules
5.1 General High-pressure vessels shall be designed with a joint efficiency of 1.
For design according to ASME VIII div. 1 joint efficiency shall be limited to either 0.85 or 1 exclusively. A unique joint efficiency shall be used for both circular and longitudinal welds as well as for any other butt weld.
Cases and features not fully covered by the Code shall be the subject of agreement in writing between the Manufacturer and the COMPANY Technology Division.
5.2 Combinations of loads All vessels and their supports, including anchor bolts, shall be designed for the most adverse condition to which they may be subjected.
For that purpose, in addition to sizing the various components for the most severe condition of coincident design pressure and temperature, the Manufacturer shall determine the stress level in the shell and support resulting from all the combinations of static and dynamic loads which may occur at any time during the vessel life.
Hull movements shall be taken into account for pressure vessels to be installed on floating facilities (accelerations and hull distortion). The analysis shall cover all potential conditions (including hydrostatic testing).
The extent and methods of that investigation and the appropriate data to be used in calculations shall be agreed as early as possible (and preferably before contract award) between the COMPANY Technology Division and the Manufacturer.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 12/44
As a minimum, the Manufacturer shall analyse the structural stability of the vessel and its support for the combinations of loading and conditions given in table 5.2.
Table 6.2 - Combination of loadings
Condition
Loading As installed Operating Hydrostatic testing (1)
Dead load (2) (3) (3)
Live load - (4) (5)
Internal and external pressure
Atmospheric (6) (7)
Temperature Atmospheric (8) Atmospheric
Wind (9) (9) (11)
Earthquake (10) (10) -
Note: (1) In operating position, in corroded condition.
(2) "Lifting weight" of the vessel, empty, new (non-corroded), including all fixed attachments, excluding loose internals and appurtenances, excluding insulation.
(3) "Operating weight" of the vessel, corroded, including any permanent equipment attached to the vessel, e.g. internals, platforms, ladders, piping, rotating equipment and drive, insulation, fireproofing.
(4) Weight of normal liquid content.
(5) Weight of water.
(6) Design pressure + static head of the maximum operating liquid level as specified in the data sheet of the vessel (including liquid specific gravity).
(7) Test pressure, including static head, vessel full of water.
(8) Design temperature.
(9) Shall not be combined with seismic load.
(10) As specified in the particular specifications. Shall not be combined with wind load.
(11) 30% of the nominal wind load used in the calculations for the operating case.
5.3 Local loads The Manufacturer shall check the localised stresses and deformations in the vessel wall due to concentrated loads caused by external and/or internal structural attachment, piping reactions, supported equipment, platform, davit, etc.
For this purpose, the Engineering Company shall issue detailed loading data to the Manufacturer for piping supports reactions, platform supports, and any other external loadings.
Piping loads on nozzles as detailed in Appendix 1 shall be used when no other data are available.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 13/44
The methods for computing such stresses shall previously be submitted to the COMPANY Technology Division acceptance (typical methods of calculations are given in WRC 107).
5.4 Maximum allowable stresses The Manufacturer shall verify that, in any combination of loadings, except the testing condition, and in any part of the vessel and support, the computed stresses do not exceed the values prescribed in the Code.
Under the condition of the hydrostatic test, the stress shall not exceed 90% of the minimum specified yield strength of the material at testing temperature. The efficiency of full penetration butt-weld joints shall be taken as 1. This verification shall be made on shell components only, except if the shell components thickness is governed by the test condition (in this case, nozzle reinforcements shall also be checked in the testing condition).
5.5 Clad vessels The thickness and the strength of the clad part of clad vessels shall not be taken into account in the mechanical calculations.
5.6 Deflection Lateral deflection of vertical vessels under the effect of dynamic loading shall not exceed the following:
• Columns with internal trays:300H
• Other vessels:200H
Where H = Total height of the vessel and support.
5.7 Minimum thicknesses
5.7.1 Shell and heads
The minimum thickness of shell and heads shall not be less than: C3800Dt ++=
Where:
t Minimum thickness in mm (rounded up to next higher mm)
D Outside diameter in mm
C Corrosion allowance in mm
This requirement applies to:
• Walls consisting of a single material (i.e. carbon, low alloy, or stainless steel, etc.)
• Clad vessels made of carbon steel (or low alloy steel) with stainless steel clad. In this case, the thickness of stainless steel shall not be included in the minimum thickness.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 14/44
5.7.2 Internals The “A” columns of table 5.7 hereafter give the minimum thicknesses for internals, including the corrosion allowance, as a function of the corrosion allowance specified for the vessel.
The “B” columns give the corrosion margin in mm included in the column A, applied as indicated by note (1) to only one side or to both sides, and according to whether or not the item is removable.
How to read table 5.7:
• Select the column according to the corrosion allowance required for the shell
• If the component is not subjected to loads requiring larger dimensions, its minimum dimensions will be selected from column A
• Otherwise, these dimensions shall be calculated, and the corrosion allowance indicated in column B shall be added to one or both sides according to the indication of note (1) of the table.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 15/44
Table 5.7 - Internals
0 1.5 3 5 6 Corrosion allowance required on the main wall of the vessel (mm) A B A B A B A B A B
Carbon-steel trays (weirs) 3 0 3 - 3.5 - 6 - 6 -
Stainless-steel downcomers (11/13 Cr) 2 0 2 - 2 - 2.7 - 3.5 -
US gauge = 14
US
gauge = 14
US
gauge= 14
US
gauge= 12
US
gauge= 10
Removable partitions, baffles, basins, (carbons steel, etc.) 3 0 4 1.5 (1) 6 3 (1) 7 5 (1) 8 6 (1)
Permanent partitions, baffles, stacks, basins, etc. or compartment separators (carbon steel)
5 0 6 1.5 8 3 12 5 14 6
Gratings and grids (carbon steel) Minimum thickness of rods 3 0 4 1.5 (1) 6 3 (1) 7 5 (1) 8 6 (1)
Internal bolts, diameter in mm (carbon or stainless steel) 10 - 10 - 10 - 10 - 12 -
Diameter ≤ 2" STD 0 STD 1.5 (1) XS 3 (1) XXS 5 (1) XXS 6 (1) Un-pressurised internal tubes (carbon steel) Diameter > 2" STD 0 STD 1.5 (1) STD 3 (1) XS 5 (1) XS 6 (1)
Main - 0 - 1.5 - 3 - 5 - 6 Support beams (carbon steel) Secondary - 0 - 1.5 (1) - 3 (1) - 5 (1) - 6 (1)
Support rings of trays, downcomers, demisters, etc.
Carbon steel 10 0 10 1.5 10 3 13 5 14 6
Stainless steel 6 6 7 7 8
• Note (1): Corrosion allowance on only one side. • Column A: Minimum dimension is thickness or diameter as appropriate. • Column B: Corrosion allowances (included in column A).
5.7.3 Skirts of vertical vessels Skirt thickness shall be a minimum of one third of the main shell thickness. In case of pressure vessels made of several sections, the skirt minimum thickness shall be taken as one third of the largest shell thickness value. (However, larger values of skirt thickness may still be required as a result of code calculations).
5.7.4 Nozzles Nozzle necks shall conform to paragraph UG 45 of ASME VIII div. 1 or AD-602 of ASME VIII div. 2, as applicable.
No flange connections shall be located inside the skirt of a vertical vessel.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 16/44
6. Calculation notes The calculation note shall be one complete set of calculation, covering all pressure vessels parts, including lifting devices, supports, nozzle loading, etc.
The calculation note shall have a clear document number with revision index and date of revision.
Each page shall be numbered. There must be a table of content with cross-reference to page numbers for each particular section.
All design data shall be listed on a summary table at the beginning of the calculation note document. The format in Appendix 2 should be used for that purpose.
Name, version number and date of the software used for the calculation shall be shown on the front page, and, if feasible, on each individual calculation note page. The name of design engineer and the date of the calculations shall also be shown on the front page.
The following items shall be part of the calculation note and shall be shown on the table of content with reference to their page number:
• Design data
• Materials used and allowable stresses determination
• Shell(s) thickness
• Head(s) thickness
• Cone(s) thickness
• Vessel sketch
• Pressure test calculation
• Stress verification under hydrostatic test conditions
• Nozzle(s) thickness and reinforcement
• Multiple openings reinforcement verification
• Nozzles loading
• Weight calculation
• Wind/Seismic analysis
• Supports calculation (including anchor bolts, even if not part of the supply)
• Lifting devices (lugs, trunnions, etc.) calculation.
7. Materials
7.1 Selection of materials Materials used shall be exclusively those listed in the relevant tables of the applicable Code (i.e., ASME VIII division 1 or 2). The use of materials not listed in the Code is not allowed, even if they are included in the ASTM specifications reproduced by the ASME Section II.
The selection of materials as a function of the design data must be made in conformity with Table 8.1. The COMPANY and/or the Engineering Company specifies the materials for each
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 17/44
vessel which may be different from the materials of Table 8.1 in certain special cases arising from the nature of the fluids or from corrosion.
The Manufacturer must request a waiver for any different selection.
Material for vessels supports (skirts, saddles, legs, etc., including their weir plates if applicable) shall be of the same material grade as for the shell/head components to which they are welded, particularly with regards to impact test requirements.
In case of vessels subject to PWHT, materials shall be ordered with guaranteed properties on the basis of simulated post weld heat treatment according to the intended heat treatment of the vessel and provisions for repairs.
For vessels subject to autorefrigeration, all materials shall be impact tested (impact test exemptions of the Code are not permitted in that situation). In this case, and wherever the Code requirements are less restrictive, the difference of the final autorefrigeration temperature with the impact test temperature of the materials shall not exceed 30°C.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 18/44
Table 8.1 - Selection of materials in relation to design temperatures
Design temperature
+ 380°C to
- 196°C (1)
+ 380°C to
- 101°C
+ 380°C to
- 46°C
+ 380°C to
- 29°C
+380°C to
+ 21°C
Max. 468°C
Type of steel 18/8 stainless steel
3.5% Ni Normalized carbon steel
Carbon steel Carbon steel 1.25 Cr-0.5 Mo
SA 240 304 (2) SA 516 SA 516 SA 515 SA 387
SA 240 304L Grade 11
SA 240 316 (2) SA 203 Grade 60 Grade 60 Grade 60 Class 1
SA 240 316L Grade D 1.25 Cr-0.5 Mo
SA 240 321 (3) or Grade E Grade 70 Grade 70 Grade 70
SA 240 347
Rolled sheet
9% Ni
SA 353
SA 182 F 304 (2) SA 350 SA 350 SA 105 SA 105 SA 182-F11
SA 182 F 304L LF 3 LF 2 1.25 Cr-0.5 Mo
SA 182 F 316 (2)
SA 182 F 316L
SA 182 F 321 (3)
Forgings
9% Ni
SA 522 Grade 1
SA 312 TP 304 (2) SA 333 SA 333 SA 106 SA 106 SA 335-P11
SA 312 TP 304L Grade 3 Grade 6 Grade B Grade B 1.25 Cr-0.5 Mo
SA 312 TP 316 (2)
SA 312 TP 316L
SA 312 TP 321 (3)
Pipes
9% Ni: SA 333 Grade 8
Threaded rods SA 320 - B8 SA320-L7 SA320-L7 SA193-B7 SA193-B7 SA193-B16
Nuts SA194GrB SA194Gr4 SA194Gr4 SA194Gr2H SA194Gr2H SA194Gr4
Notes to table 8.1: The above materials are to ASME II standards.
1. Materials to equivalent ASTM standards are authorised for non-stamped vessels.
2. TP304 and 316 alloys are not authorised in welded applications.
3. TP321 alloy is limited in temperature to a minimum of -145°C in welded applications.
7.2 Equivalent materials Whenever the Manufacturer cannot use the materials specified in paragraph 7.1, equivalent materials may be proposed to the COMPANY Technology Division for approval; his choice should be substantiated by equivalencies recognised by standards. The final decision of the
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 19/44
COMPANY Technology Division would be based on mutual acceptance for the allowable stress used for design calculation.
However for stamped vessels, materials used must strictly conform to those listed in the relevant division of the ASME code (no substitution is authorised).
7.3 Weldability of C-Mn steels Carbon-manganese steels shall have a maximum carbon content of 0.23%.
The carbon equivalent of these materials (based on ladle analysis), calculated using the formula (IIW):
15Cu + Ni +
5 V+ Mo + Cr +
6Mn + C = CE
shall be less than 0.420.
7.4 Clad vessels Unless otherwise specified the thickness of the cladding shall be 3 mm minimum.
7.5 Flange gaskets and gasket contact faces The gaskets are specified in the particular specifications and must comply with the following standards:
• ASME B 16.20: Ring joint gaskets and grooves for steel pipe flanges
• ASME B 16.21: Non-metallic gaskets for pipe flanges.
Except otherwise specified, the following rule shall apply:
Table 8.4 - Flange gaskets and gasket contact faces
Type of gasket Surface condition of
flanges (contact faces) as per MSS SP 6
Mean roughness (max. value)
Flat gasket (series 150 & 300)
1/16 raised concentric serrated or "stock finish"
150 microns approx. 50 microns
Spiral wound (series 150, 300 & 600)
1/16 raised or 1/4 raised "smooth finish"
250 AARH (or 6.3 microns)
Ring joint (series 900 and above)
smooth (grooved) 63 AARH (or 1.5 microns)
Gasket contact faces for metal joints such as ring joints must be at least 20 Brinell harder than the joints.
7.6 Bolting
7.6.1 External bolting The external bolting of vessels for the assembly of the flanges of manholes, handholes, nozzles with blind flanges, etc., must always consist of threaded studs and nuts. They shall have a
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 20/44
protection, against corrosion in accordance with GS EP COR 350 or GS EP COR 354. Threading shall be as per ASME B 1.1 (diameter in inches):
• UNC for threaded studs up to 1" in diameter
• 8N for diameters over 1".
7.6.2 Internal bolting The internal bolting must comply with ASME B 1.1 threading as defined for external bolting. It may consist either of threaded studs and nuts, or of bolts and nuts.
7.7 Suborders of materials Suborders for materials or components shall include all applicable requirements from the relevant specifications and requisition of the pressure vessel. Unpriced copies of all suborders including requisitions and any further change orders shall be issued to the COMPANY for information.
8. Rules of construction
8.1 Shell and heads welded joints number The number of shell and heads welded joints shall be minimised.
Shell rings 2800 mm or less in outside diameter shall have not more than one longitudinal welded joint.
The maximum number of circumferential joints, exclusive of head-to-shell joints, shall be determined as a function of the total length “L” of the cylindrical shell between tangent lines as follows:
Table 9.1 - Shell circumferential welded joints number
L (mm) Number of circumferential joints
≤ 2400 0
≤ 4800 1
≤ 7200 2
≤ 9500 3
> 9500 (See note below)
Note: Beyond these length values, one additional joint every 2500-mm of L.
8.2 Welded joint layout Welded joints shall be so arranged that:
• Visual inspection can be made with all internals in place
• No openings intersect with a weld seam
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 21/44
• No saddle bearing plates, nozzle-reinforcing pads, or wear plate cover longitudinal or girth joints
• No nozzle or other attachment weld edge shall be closer to the nearest weld edge than 1.5 times the related shell or head wall thickness, with a minimum distance of 50 mm
• Centres of the longitudinal joints of two adjacent courses shall be staggered 30° minimum apart and preferably be off-centre relative to the vessel main centrelines. For horizontal vessels, they shall be located above the horizontal plane through the centreline of the vessel.
8.3 Type of welded joints All longitudinal and circumferential joints, and in as much as possible, all pressure retaining joints, shall be double-sided butt-welds and shall conform to type no. (1) of the Code table UW-12.
Welds inaccessible for double-sided welding (e.g. circumferential closing joint of small diameter vessels, piping and fitting butt welds) shall be single butt welds equivalent to a double butt-welded type no. (1) of the Code table UW-12 (which means in particular full access for visual inspection at the back side of the weld).
Attachment of intermediate heads shall be as shown in the Code Fig UW-13.1 sketch (f).
8.4 Heads Heads shall be semi-ellipsoidal, in one piece for carbon, low alloy and clad steel vessels up to 2300 mm in diameter, with an integral straight flange of 50 mm minimum length.
Hemispherical heads shall be used preferably for High Pressure Vessels even if not already specified in the vessel data sheet.
Other types of formed heads are not permitted.
For vessels with internal diameter less than 1000 mm I.D, flanged heads may be accepted.
8.5 Transitions Conical shell-reducer sections shall have a half-apex angle not greater than 30°. Any reinforcement for internal pressure shall be provided by increased plate thickness; a stiffening ring may be used to satisfy external pressure requirements only.
8.6 Body flanges Full diameter body flanges may be of the slip-on type for pressure class 150 only. Over class 150, the welding neck type is required. All flanges must be of the raised face type (flat face is not permitted).
• If the diameter of the vessel is a standardised dimension:
The flanges shall comply with one of the following standards:
1. ASME B 16.5 up to a diameter of 24" inclusive
2. ASME B 16.47 for diameters over 24" Series A only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 22/44
3. Alternatively: ASME B 16.30 for the class 150 (slip-on flanges, regardless of diameter)
4. Outside the limits of the above standards, body flanges shall be designed according to the Code.
• If the diameter of the vessel is not standardised:
The flanges shall be designed in accordance with the Code.
8.7 Supports
8.7.1 Vertical vessels All vertical vessels shall be designed to be freestanding and self-supporting on a cylindrical or conical skirt in accordance with SD EP PVV 208 and SD EP PVV 205. The cylindrical skirt plate centreline shall coincide with the shell wall centerline. The base ring shall always be of the double base ring type as shown on SD EP PVV 205.
Vessels 1000 mm OD or less and weighing 1200 kg or less (empty weight) may be supported on structural legs in accordance with SD EP PVV 209.
No brackets, lugs, ring girder nor other type of supports shall be used.
Tailing lugs, when required, must be located on the skirt and not on the vessel wall; they shall be attached to the skirt base ring without interference with the attachment bolts of the vessel. Skirt reinforcement, if needed (e.g. for lifting purpose), must be located outside the skirt envelope. No temporary reinforcements are permitted, whether inside or outside the skirt envelop.
8.7.2 Horizontal vessels These vessels are generally supported by two saddles (standard no. SD EP PVV 206 or SD EP PVV 207), located as close as possible to the heads. The Manufacturer must calculate the stresses and deformations resulting from these supports and decide whether or not it is necessary to reinforce the vessel. The contact angle of the saddle support shall be a minimum of 120°.
8.8 Connections - Nozzles and Manholes Threaded fittings or couplings shall not be utilised.
Self reinforced type nozzles shall mandatorily be used on high pressure vessels and H2S service.
8.8.1 Reference Standards Connection components shall conform to the following standards:
8.8.1.1 Flanges Flanges shall be of welding neck type and shall comply with the following standards:
• Up to NPS 24: ASME B 16.5
• Over NPS 24: ASME B 16.47 Series A only.
Outside the limits of the above standards, flanges shall be calculated according to the Code.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 23/44
8.8.1.2 Nozzles Nozzles shall comply with the standard ASME B 36.10M. Carbon and low alloy steel pipes 16 inches and smaller in diameter shall be seamless.
8.8.1.3 Welding fittings Welding fittings shall comply with the standard ASME B 16.9.
8.8.2 Sizes Minimum nozzle size shall be 2" NPS. However, when a connection must be smaller, a reducing flange matching a 2" nozzle neck may be used. Alternatively, a concentric reducer may be inserted between a 2" pipe neck and the required smaller flange. See SD EP PVV 212.
Sizes 2”½, 3”½ and 5" NPS shall not be used.
When specified in the particular specifications, the inside diameter of nozzles shall be maintained, particularly for connections that must receive equipment or manholes through which internals shall be installed.
8.8.3 Reinforcement Added reinforcement plate, when provided, shall have a minimum width of 50 mm and shall be in one piece.
Welded reinforcement should also be avoided when the temperature of the vessel exceeds 400°C, regardless of pressure. In this case, integral reinforcement, tapered for butt-welding to the shell, should be used.
Self-reinforcing forged nozzles shall also be used for High Pressure Vessels or vessels in Hydrogen or H2S service.
With reference to UG-40 of ASME VIII div. 1, self-reinforcing nozzle dimensions shall be such that the length “L” is always equal or greater than 2.5 tx. (This is only applicable to ASME VIII div. 1 calculations).
8.8.4 Nozzles for sloping horizontal vessels When the horizontal centreline of the vessel slopes, the nozzles must be vertical and horizontal and not perpendicular and parallel to the vessel.
8.8.5 Nozzles for stainless steel vessels (Walls made of solid stainless steel or covered with stainless steel by cladding, or weld deposit).
The nozzles shall be built up as follows:
• Tubular portion 5. For a solid stainless-steel wall: Pipe made of the same grade of stainless steel, welded
or seamless, according to fabrication possibilities
6. For a carbon or low-alloy steel wall with stainless steel cladding: Seamless carbon or low-alloy steel pipe with stainless steel weld overlay.
• Flanges Flanges in Carbon steel must be weld overlaid with stainless steel.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 24/44
• Thickness of the stainless steel weld overlay The effective thickness of weld deposit must be at least equal to that of the cladding of the shell of the vessel, with the understanding that the effective thickness means the thickness of the stainless steel coating having the same structure and composition as the stainless steel specified, not counting the dilution zone. In all cases, this weld deposit must be applied in a minimum of two passes.
• Long nozzle connections within the skirt of cladded vessels Flanged connections within the skirt are prohibited.
Typical weld details for long nozzle connections for 2" and 3" nozzle diameters are given on figure 8.8.5 hereafter.
SS SHALL BE 321 OR 316 L depending of pressure and temperature design conditions
S.S.HOMOGENEOUS
WELD *
SSPIPE
C.S. HOMOGENEOUSWELD
C.S.PLATE
C.S. FORGING
316 L CLADDING
316 L CLAD RESTORING
309 Mo CLAD RESTORING
MACHINEDSURFACE
316 L WELDOVERLAY
309 Mo WELDOVERLAY
BOLTING RING
SSPIPESS
FLANGE
SSPIPE
see detail here under
Figure 9.8.5 - Long nozzle connections within the skirt of cladded vessels
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 25/44
The stainless steel pipe and the flange shall be welded after post weld heat treatment.
All welds made after PWHT shall be 100% radiographed.
8.8.6 Manholes Except when provided with a bolted full diameter end closure, all vessels 800 mm O.D. and larger shall have at least one manhole for inspection, maintenance and operation requirements.
Several manholes may be necessary to ease the access inside the vessels and removal of internals. In any case for vessels having a length higher than 9m, two manholes are required.
Manholes shall conform to SD EP PVV 214, SD EP PVV 216 and SD EP PVV 218,
24" diameter manholes are preferred. Inside diameter of smaller manholes shall not be less than 20 inches (500 mm).
8.8.7 Connection attachment to shell Typical details are shown in SD EP PVV 213.
Nozzle connections shall be of the set-in type. Set-on attachment type is not permitted.
Nozzle and manhole necks shall be attached to the vessel wall and to the separate reinforcement, when added, by full penetration groove welds, preferably double-welded.
Except when a piping extension into the vessel is provided, the inner edge of the connection neck shall be flush with the inside contour of the shell and shall have inside corners rounded to 3 mm radius.
Connections shall project from the vessel as required for easy access to, and removal of flange studs and nuts, accounting for insulation as appropriates.
Bolt holes in flanges of connections located in heads shall straddle the principal centrelines of the vessel, or lines parallel thereto. Bolt holes in flanges of connections located in shell shall straddle the vertical centreline of the vessel.
8.8.8 Stand pipes Stand pipes shall be avoided as far as possible.
When stand pipe is inevitable the related vessel nozzles shall be 3” minimum diameter. The distance between the standpipe and the nozzles shall be minimised. Stand pipe shall be installed without isolating valves.
The actual loads induced by the standpipe shall not exceed the maximum allowable loads as per Appendix 1. The design of the nozzles shall be verified for these maximum allowable loads. If necessary, nozzles shall be of the self-reinforced type; opening reinforcement pads are not allowed whichever the rating.
Stand pipes shall be equipped with vent and drain valves.
8.9 Other attachments to vessel walls Appurtenances welded to the outside surface of the vessel may include stiffeners, lifting lugs, rings, clips and miscellaneous supports for platforms, ladders, davit, piping, insulation, fireproofing or other equipment.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 26/44
Fixed internals may include rings, bars, brackets and clips to support trays and downcomers, piping, gratings and mesh, distributors, etc., as well as baffles, weirs, impingement and wear plates, ladder rungs, etc.
Typical details are shown in the following COMPANY standards:
• SD EP PVV 220: Ladder rungs
• SD EP PVV 221: Vortex breaker
• SD EP PVV 222: Impingement plates
• SD EP PVV 225: Davit
• SD EP PVV 230: Insulation supports - Vertical vessels
• SD EP PVV 231: Insulation supports - Horizontal vessels.
These supports, except as otherwise indicated in the particular specifications, must be made of the same grades of material as the walls to which they are welded.
Any interference between these supports and the shell welds or between the supports themselves must be reported by the Manufacturer to the Engineering Company before the supports in question are set in place.
Corners of doubling plates shall be rounded off to a radius of not less than 25 mm.
Welds
• Attachment welds to the vessel wall shall be designed to the same allowable stress limits required for pressure retaining parts
• Attachments shall be continuously welded to the vessel
• All doubler plate pads welded to the vessel shall have at least one 6 mm telltale hole in lower position of pad
• Lifting lugs and trunnions attachment welds to the shell shall be full penetration welds.
8.10 Lifting devices Vessels shall have lifting lugs or trunnions that shall be designed with a dynamic factor of 1.5. This verification shall take into account the shackle and sling specific characteristics, and shall be based on the actual lifting procedure related to each lifting operation of the vessel. Allowable stresses must be limited to the following:
• Allowable shear stress: 0.40 x Fy
• Allowable bending stress: 0.66 x Fy
• Allowable tension stress: 0.60 x Fy
• Allowable bearing stress: 0.90 x Fy
Where Fy is the Yield stress of the material used.
The stress combination must be done according to the AISC manual of steel construction.
Local loads during lifting shall also be checked using the WRC 107 method.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 27/44
8.11 Internals Removable internals shall be designed to pass through the vessel manhole(s) and shall allow easy installation and removal.
Internal piping 6" NPS and larger shall be flanged for ease of removal.
9. Fabrication
9.1 General Fabrication shall not commence until the Manufacturer has received written authorisation from the COMPANY.
The Manufacturer shall not subcontract any work without previous written acceptance by the COMPANY. This acceptance may require from the COMPANY an audit at the Sub-Contractor premises.
Machined faces and edges shall be protected against damage during fabrication and against oxidisation during heat treatment.
All fabrication shall be carried-out in-door, in a dedicated workshop-out-door or under-shelter fabrication is not authorised.
9.2 Cutting Shear cutting shall not be utilised for pressure retaining plate material. Machining flame cutting, or plasma cutting shall be used exclusively.
9.3 Forming Plate forming shall normally be such as to have generating line parallel to the final direction of mill rolling.
Forming above 150°C shall not be made unless the relevant Manufacturer’s detailed procedure is previously accepted in writing by the COMPANY Technology Division. In this case, forming shall be followed by a heat treatment (normalising or quench and tempering, as appropriate), and mechanical properties of the material shall be checked on production coupons having been subject to the same heat treatment, at the same time, and in the same furnace as the related plate (simulated heat treatment is not authorised for that purpose). In addition, and wherever possible, these production coupons shall be taken directly from each related plate after forming.
Forming at temperatures below 450°C by "step rolling" or bending of steels having a Yield Strength over Ultimate Tensile Strength ratio larger than 0.75 is not permitted. This process is also not permitted on Quenched and Tempered steels below the same temperature (i.e. 450°C).
9.4 Welding Welding shall comply with the COMPANY General Specification GS EP PVV 611 with the following additional requirements:
9.4.1 Welding technique Whenever practicable, welding shall be done in the flat position.
Welds made of only one pass are not acceptable on pressure containment welds.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 28/44
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) is not acceptable, even on root passes.
Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) process is acceptable only on nozzles to vessel connection welds and if used with shielding gas. It may also be used on non-pressure parts welds.
All double-sided butt-welds shall be back-gouged by arc-air followed by grinding down to sound metal prior to back welding. However, for vessel wall thickness 12 mm and below, back gouging may be performed by grinding only, provided all relevant welds are 100% radiographed.
9.4.2 Welding documents Before starting any fabrication work, the Manufacturer must submit one set of welding documents per vessel, including at least the following items of information, to the Engineering Company and the Inspection Agency for approval:
9.4.2.1 Reference
• Order number of COMPANY or Engineering Company
• Name and identification of the vessel
• Place of fabrication.
9.4.2.2 Weld map A sketch of the vessel showing the types of joint and seam locations for the vessel and such welded fittings as supports, gussets, reinforcements, internals, etc.
Each weld of this weld map must be cross-referenced to a WPS number.
9.4.2.3 Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) (On form QW 482 of the ASME code, Section IX), including:
• The identification number of the qualification test record supporting each welding procedure specification (record to be attached, presented on form QW 483 of the ASME code, Section IX)
• Type of preparation (oxy-gas cutting, grinding, machining, etc.)
• Welding process
• Welding position
• Identification of welder(s) or operator(s)
• Filler material (wires, electrodes) and diameters
• Protecting flux
• Refractory (tungsten) electrode (diameter)
• Characteristics of electric current
• Speed of execution of each pass
• Preheating, post-heating
• Welding equipment
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 29/44
• Gouging (type)
• Post weld heat treatment.
9.4.3 Approval of welders The Manufacturer must issue a list of approved welders. This list shall specify, in particular:
• The identification number of each welder
• The number and date of the certificate of qualification (certificate to be attached to form QW 484 of the ASME code, Section IX)
• The term of validity.
This list must be certified by the Inspection Agency.
9.5 Post-weld heat treatment
9.5.1 General Post Weld Heat Treatment shall be carried out only after all welding operations (including insulation or fireproofing support attachments) as been achieved.
If, as is provided for in paragraph 7.2 of this specification, equivalent materials are accepted, the "P number" criterion attributed by the Code to the equivalent ASTM materials must also be applied.
The heat treatment record chart must be submitted by the Manufacturer to the Inspection Agency's approval.
9.5.2 Specific requirements In addition to the Code requirements, a post weld heat treatment must also be applied in the following cases:
• Vessels made of Carbon Steel materials and operating in a "sour wet" condition, as defined by NACE MR 01-75 "Sulfide stress cracking resistant metallic materials for oil field equipment"
• Vessels containing alkaline solutions must undergo post weld heat treatment when the design temperatures are higher than the following temperatures:
N462573T −=
Where:
T limiting temperature without treatment (°C)
N content in percent (by weight) of caustic soda in the solution.
The treatment is not necessary for solutions:
2. Of which the concentration by weight is less than 1.5%
3. At ambient temperature, regardless of concentration.
• Vessels containing solutions of potassium carbonate at concentrations over 2% (by weight) must be post weld heat treated when the design temperatures are over 90°C or when the vessels are equipped with reheaters without temperature alarms
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 30/44
• Vessels containing solutions of monoethanolamine must undergo post weld heat treatment
• The Manufacturer is authorised to propose a heat treatment when he deems it necessary, even if neither the Code nor Local Regulations require it
• Other cases may require heat treatment; this is then stipulated in the vessel data sheet or requisitions.
9.5.3 Post Weld Heat Treatment procedure A Post Weld Heat Treatment procedure shall be submitted to the COMPANY for approval prior to fabrication. This procedure shall include a layout and elevation map showing the installation of the vessel inside the furnace together with the location and number of thermocouples. The location of fabrication coupons in the furnace together with appropriate number of thermocouples shall also be shown on the same sketch.
The PWHT procedure shall also include a detailed description of the furnace (dimensions, means of loading, heating sources, number and location of burners, temperature recording devices). This procedure shall also detail in advance the full-proposed thermal cycle.
9.5.4 Post Weld Heat Treatment process As far as feasible, the PWHT shall be done on the vessel as a completed unit, and not in section.
Thermocouples shall be evenly spread on the vessel surface, including top, bottom, sides, and heads parts, they must also be located at any major change in wall thickness. In case of wall thickness exceeding 75 mm a minimum of two thermocouples shall be located inside the vessel, and located close to main nozzles like manways or large inlet/outlet nozzles.
Minimum number of thermocouples: a minimum of six thermocouples is required on outer surface of the vessel, disregarding the thermocouples which might be eventually required inside the vessel and those required on fabrication coupons.
Heating process: heat treatment using internal flame process inside the vessel is not permitted.
9.6 Production test pieces In addition to the Code requirements production test pieces shall be provided for any vessel subject to PWHT.
Fabrication coupons include two test pieces using the same welding procedures as those used for the assembly of the main seams of the vessel and the same materials (basic metal and filler metals), at the same time. There must be one set of two fabrication coupons for each WPS used either on circular or longitudinal welds. The thicknesses of the test pieces must match the thickness of the thickest wall, not including any reinforcements. These test pieces must furthermore undergo the same heat treatments as the vessel itself, in the same furnace and at the same time.
The mechanical tests to be carried out on these test pieces shall be those required for type approval of the corresponding weld procedures, and their results must satisfy the same criteria.
Mechanical tests shall be carried-out on only one of the two test pieces, the second one being kept for any necessary investigation or re-test in the future. This second coupon shall not be cut or touched in any way without the prior acceptance of the COMPANY.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 31/44
The results must be certified by the Inspection Agency and reported to the Engineering Company.
10. Pressure tests
10.1 Shop tests Without exception, the shop tests are hydraulic tests.
Vessels are tested in the shop, in a position compatible with their dimensions. However, for vertical vessels, which are shop-tested in the horizontal position, the shop test pressure must be increased by the hydrostatic head corresponding to the vessel field-tested full of water in the vertical position, in compliance with the calculation note.
10.2 Testing procedure A fully detailed testing procedure shall be submitted to the COMPANY for approval prior to fabrication.
This procedure shall include a sketch of the vessel showing details and number of temporary supports during the test, location of pressure gauges, the position of the vessel, pressure gauges range, location of vents and drains, etc.
• The vessels shall be tested in the presence of the Inspection Agency, before being painted.
• Prior to testing, the vessels shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from dirt, debris, loose scale and slag, pieces of metal, weld spatter, oil and grease, etc.
• Tightness of welded attachments with telltale hole shall preliminarily be air and soapsuds tested.
• Service bolting shall be used for pressure testing; bolts and nuts shall be thoroughly inspected after testing and replaced whenever damaged. This inspection shall be witnessed by the Inspection Agency.
• Gaskets shall be the same as for the service type, dry or coated with graphite. Use of compounds, glue, lead, is not permitted. Metallic "O"-rings gaskets shall be replaced after testing if damaged. All other gaskets shall be replaced with new ones after testing.
• All air shall be vented from the vessel before the pressure is applied.
• Test pressure shall be held at least one hour during visual examination of the vessel by the Inspection Agency.
• Immediately after draining, vessel shall be dried and cleaned thoroughly.
10.3 Temperature and quality of the test water Testing medium shall be clean, fresh water. When testing stainless steel vessels, the water shall have a maximum chloride content of 15 ppm and shall be inhibited; the inhibitor shall be constituted of 3 ppm of sodium nitrate (Na NO3) per ppm of chloride in water, and of 12 ppm of oxygen scavenger per ppm of oxygen in water.
If vessel envelope materials (other than austenitic stainless steels) are not impact tested, both the test water and the envelope metal temperatures shall be a minimum of + 16°C. In all other
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 32/44
cases, these temperatures shall be at least 10°C above the impact test temperature of envelope materials, with a minimum of + 10°C.
11. Inspection and quality assurance
11.1 General Materials, design, fabrication and preparation for shipment of each vessel shall be subject to inspection by the COMPANY and/or the Inspection Agency designated in the contract and, if applicable, by the certification authority.
However, the acceptance of any work and/or release of the vessels by the COMPANY and/or the Inspection Agency shall in no way relieve the Manufacturer of any responsibility for carrying out all the provisions of the Code and this specification.
Unless otherwise stated in the contract, all qualifications, examinations, tests or inspections shall be made at the place of fabrication.
The Manufacturer shall notify the COMPANY and the Inspection Agency, at least ten working days in advance, of the date of tests or inspections to be witnessed.
11.2 Quality Assurance system For prior evaluation and audit, the COMPANY and/or the Inspection Agency may require the written description of the Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance System.
11.3 Quality plan Within six weeks from the effective date of contract, the Manufacturer shall set out a step by step inspection program for the COMPANY and the Inspection Agency approval.
This program shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Code and shall itemise all required stages of design; procurement, fabrication and inspection with hold points.
11.4 Material verification, inspection, and testing
11.4.1 General Plates 30 mm and thicker shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with ASME code Section V and SA 578 level II (periphery and grid pattern).
Clad plates shall be ultrasonically examined in accordance with ASME code section V and SA 578-S.7. This is also applicable to any part of the vessel subject to clad restoration by weld overlay (in this case, the surface subject to testing shall include a minimum of 50 mm width of clad metal each side in addition to the weld deposit surface).
Other suitable supplementary testing or examination may include, but are not limited to:
• Chemical analysis (product analysis)
• Grain size
• Etching test
• Mechanical testing:
4. After simulated post weld heat treatment (if applicable)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 33/44
5. Additional tensile tests:
6. At design temperature
7. On the opposite end of each plate-as-rolled
8. Reduction of area
9. Bend test
10. Flattening test
11. Hardness test
12. Impact test
• Corrosion test
• Ultrasonic testing, magnetic particle, liquid penetrant examinations.
11.4.2 Repairs No repairs shall be made unless previously accepted in writing by the COMPANY Technology Division.
11.4.3 Material test reports For all pressure parts (plates, heads, nozzles, flanges, etc.) as well as for supports (skirt, saddles, legs), the Manufacturer shall provide material test reports showing the results of the required tests and inspection, including supplementary requirements if any. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204 3.1.B.
Material certificates for non-pressure parts shall conform to EN 10204 2.2.
11.4.4 Material identification sketch For each vessel, the Manufacturer shall prepare a material identification sketch showing the marking on every piece and referencing the related material test report or certificate.
11.4.5 Transfer of markings Transfer of markings shall be made by the Manufacturer prior to cutting and shall be witnessed by the Inspection Agency.
11.5 Welding inspection
11.5.1 Visual and non-destructive examinations Visual and non-destructive examinations of weld preparation and welded joints shall conform to the requirements of the Code, the COMPANY General Specification GS EP PVV 611 and the following:
• Non-destructive examination procedures shall be submitted for approval to the COMPANY and the Inspection Agency before fabrication starts.
• In case joint efficiency of 1 is used in calculation, all butt welds shall be 100% radiographed, regardless of welded joint category as defined by the Code.
• Spot radiography shall include all butt-weld intersections and not less than 10% of each longitudinal and circumferential joint length in the shell and heads. Butt-weld intersection
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 34/44
radiographic examination includes one film in each direction of both circular and longitudinal welds.
• The Inspection Agency shall select in advance the locations at which spot radiographs will be taken.
• Nozzle attachment welds to vessel walls shall be 100% inspected by ultrasonic examination.
• In addition to the requirements of the General Specification GS EP PVV 611, attachments to pressure parts including intermediate heads, lifting lugs and skirt-to-shell weldments shall be subject to magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination.
Fillet and butt welds that cannot be radiographed or ultrasonically examined shall be checked by magnetic particle or dye penetrant examination in accordance with the method specified by the Code.
This requirement applies to all welds, including the welded zones of temporary fabrication attachments.
• All butt-welds of High Pressure Vessels shall be 100% radiographed and 100% Ultrasonically tested.
• All NDT including radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examinations shall be performed before and after Post Weld Heat Treatment of the Vessel.
• Radiographic inspection must be done by X-rays using the European standard EN 584-1 category C3 (or better) quality films (Industrex MX125 or equivalent). However, and subject to prior written approval of the COMPANY Technology Division, radiography may be performed using gamma rays provided EN 584-1 category 2 (or better) quality films are used (Industrex M or equivalent).
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 35/44
Other standards for film quality (like ISO 5579, ASTM E 1815, or others) shall not be used for this purpose, as they are in general less accurate in film classification than EN 584-1. Equivalence of films recognised by the COMPANY Technology Division is given on table 11.5.1 hereafter:
Table 12.5.1 - Equivalence of films recognised by the COMPANY Technology Division
Film type EN 584-1 category recognised by the
COMPANY Type of radiographic examination related
KODAK INDUSTREX MX 125
C3 X-rays only
AGFA D4 C3 X-rays only
FUJI IX 50 C3 X-rays only
KODAK INDUSTREX M C2 Gamma rays or X-rays
AGFA D3 C2 Gamma rays or X-rays
KODAK INDUSTREX DR50 C1 Gamma rays or X-rays
AGFA D2 C1 Gamma rays or X-rays
FUJI IX25 C1 Gamma rays or X-rays
• Qualification of NDT personnel:
13. All operators, including for Dye Penetrant or Magnetic Particle Inspection, must be qualified to SNT-TC-1A level I, as a minimum
14. Interpretation must be carried-out by inspectors holding at least a valid certificate to SNT-TC-1A level II.
11.6 Dimensional check The final dimensional check and visual inspection shall be performed after the hydrostatic test. Tolerances shall be as shown in SD EP PVV 201 and in the Code, whichever is more stringent.
If so required in the requisition, removable internals shall be trial fitted inside the vessel.
12. Nameplate Each complete vessel shall be provided with a nameplate as shown in SD EP PVV 223, securely attached and so located that it is easily accessible after the vessel installation. The nameplate shall be on a bracket welded to the shell. Insulated vessels shall have bracket to provide 25 mm clearance between nameplate and the outside surface of insulation.
13. Preparation for shipment
13.1 General Cleaning, packing, shipping and storage requirements shall be subject to the COMPANY approval.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 36/44
No vessel or vessel section shall be released for shipment without the COMPANY prior written authorisation.
13.2 Particular requirements After completion of fabrication and testing, the vessels shall be thoroughly drained of water and dried.
After drying out, the vessels or sections shall be cleaned externally and internally of weld spatter, weld slag, flux deposits, burrs and splinters, loose mill scale and all other foreign matter.
Internal surfaces of stainless steel vessels shall be pickled and passivated.
External surfaces of vessels shall be blasted and painted as prescribed in GS EP COR 350 or GS EP COR 354 and in the requisition.
Internal surfaces of carbon steel vessels shall be blasted and painted as prescribed in GS EP COR 352 when required in the requisition. Orientation of vertical vessels shall be clearly marked with white paint on the top and bottom portions of the shell (axes 0°, 90°, 180° and 270° respectively).
All machined surfaces shall be cleaned with a suitable solvent and immediately be protected with an easily removable rust preventive coating or plastic film.
Surfaces adjacent to gasket faces shall be protected in the same manner for a distance of 100 mm.
All connection openings shall be sealed with one-piece plywood covers or heavy plastic caps taped to the nozzle.
Permanent blind flanges or covers included in the Manufacturer’s supply shall be bolted with gaskets, stud bolts and nuts in place, ready for service.
Telltale holes shall be fitted with wooden plugs or may be packed with sealant grease.
Internals installed prior to shipment when required shall be properly secured and protected.
Removable internals, davit, anchor bolts, spares and all other loose items as required in the particular specifications, shall be adequately marked or tagged for identification and packed in fully waterproof and moisture proof lined wooden crates, items being separately wrapped in a plastic sheet, if appropriate.
Copy of the packing list shall be fixed inside the crates.
13.3 Packing The package and protection of equipment shall be suitable for inland and/or sea transportation and for a storage period as defined in the project specification. Supply shall include complete export boxing packing in compliance with this requirement.
All equipment and piping likely to vibrate during transportation shall be properly braced to prevent damage.
Dessicant bags shall be located in all capacities to prevent built-up of condensation and warning notices shall be attached
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 37/44
14. Fittings and spare parts
14.1 Fittings All fittings mentioned in the particular specifications are included in the supply. These include, in particular:
• Manhole covers with their handling apparatus (davit)
• Major supports (saddles, skirts and legs)
• Other supports (for insulation, structures, platforms, piping, etc.)
• Blind flanges for tests and the corresponding studs and gaskets
• All internals together with their attachment bolts and other fittings.
14.2 Spare parts The spare parts shall include at least:
• Two sets of gaskets (including manholes gaskets)
• 5% of studs, bolts, nuts, washers, etc., of each type (with a minimum of two units)
• Other parts, such as internals, if required in the particular specifications.
15. Documentation
15.1 Language and format of documents The Manufacturer’s documentation shall be:
• Identified as required in the contract
• In English language
• In S.I. units (except diameter of nozzles and flanges which shall be in nominal inch size).
Sizes of drawings shall be A1 or A2. Other documents shall be A4 or A3 size, as appropriate.
15.2 Detail of documents to be submitted for review For each vessel, the Manufacturer shall submit for the COMPANY review printed and/or reproducible copies of design and fabrication documents and subsequent revisions. These documents include at least the following:
15.2.1 Outline and assembly drawings These documents shall show all design basis and vessel data as listed hereafter:
• Applicable Code including edition and addenda
• Applicable COMPANY specifications
• Maximum Service Pressure (MSP)
• Maximum and minimum Service Temperatures (MST and mST)
• Design pressure(s)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 38/44
• Design temperature(s)
• Other loadings
• Corrosion allowance
• Joint efficiency
• Insulation
• Materials specifications
• Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT)
• (Procedure no. … date …)
• Hydrostatic test pressure
• Lifting weight
• Operating weight
• Hydrostatic test weight.
15.2.2 Detail drawings These documents shall include as a minimum:
• Nozzles
• Supports
• Internals
• Welding details
• Nameplate.
15.2.3 Welding documents These documents shall include as a minimum:
• Weld map
• Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)
• Procedures Qualification Records (PQR).
15.2.4 Fabrication procedures These documents shall include as a minimum:
• Forming procedures for shell plates and heads
• Post weld heat treatment procedure
• NDT procedures
• Pressure test procedures.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 39/44
15.3 Manufacturer data report In case of stamped vessels, the Manufacturer data report must be signed by the ASME Authorised Inspector and must be issued to the COMPANY during the final testing and inspection of the vessels.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
Appendix 1
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 40/44
Appendix 1 Nozzle loads
1. General The criteria specified shall apply to process nozzles DN50 (NPS 2) and larger.
Nozzles shall be designed to withstand forces and moments from the thermal expansion and dead weight of piping. Piping reactions shall be within the limiting criteria set by this standard.
The forces and moments contained in this specification are considered as minimum criteria in order to allow for an economical design of the connecting piping.
Nozzles shall be suitable for a total number of 7000 full temperature cycles over expected life times.
2. External forces and moments on nozzles Each nozzle shall be capable of withstanding forces and moments from external piping under design conditions and considered to be acting at the intersection of nozzle and shell in corroded condition.
In the formulas “D” is the nominal diameter in inches. The “B” value in the formulas depends on the rating of the nozzle flanges as follows:
ASME Flange Rating “B” value of Heat Exchangers
“B” value of Columns and Drums
Class 150 0.75 0.6
Class 300 0.75 0.7
Class 600 1.25 0.8
Class 900 3.0 1.8
Class 1500 4.0 3.0
Class 2500 5.6 3.3
2.1 Nozzles to shells or channels
• Longitudinal bending moment ML = B.130.D² Nm
• Circumferential bending moment Mφ = B.100 D² Nm
• Resultant bending moment )MML(Mb 22 φ+= = B.164.D² Nm
• Torsional moment Mt = B.150.D² Nm
• Axial force in plane of flange FL = B.2000.D N
• Tangential force in plane of flange Fφ = B.1500.D N
• Resultant shear force )FFL(Fr 22 φ+= = B.2500.D N
• Radial tension or compression force FA = B.2000.D N
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
Appendix 1
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 41/44
2.2 Nozzles to formed heads
• Resultant bending moment Mb = B.164.D² Nm Where Mb is the resultant of the components Mx and Mz
• Torsional moment Mt = B.150.D² Nm
• Resultant shear force Fr = B.2500.D N Where Fr is the resultant of the components Fx and Fz
• Radial tension or compression force FA = B.2000.D N
For orientation of the directions of forces and moments on shell/channel and heads, see Sketch No. 1
The above-mentioned loading shall criteria as being caused by 67% thermal - and 33% dead weight load
Calculation method and design criteria for the basic stress intensity limits shall be based as follows:
• Calculation method:
WRC 107/297 (cylindrical shells)
WRC 107 (heads)
• Design criteria:
ASME VIII Div 2 Appendix 4, or
PD 5500 Appendix A.
Documents and codes shall be the latest edition.
The effect of design pressure loading together with an appropriate stress concentration factor (SCF) shall be taken into account according to PD 5500 App. G/code case 5500/19. An equivalent method to determine the SCF shall be subjected to the COMPANY approval.
The stresses shall be checked in two locations:
• Shell/head to nozzle junction
• At the outer edge of the reinforcing ring or insert plate (insert plate: a local increase of shell/head thickness around the nozzle).
3. Additional reinforcement Whenever stresses based on loadings calculated according to the above requirements exceed the allowable stresses, the Manufacturer shall apply additional reinforcing above the reinforcing required for pressure loading as follows:
• A reinforcing ring when not before required for pressure loading
• A larger reinforcing ring than already required for pressure loading
• A thicker/larger insert plate than already required for pressure loading.
In case the calculated stresses are still too high, the Manufacturer shall inform the COMPANY on the multiplication factor (< 1) applied simultaneously on all loadings for which the allowable stresses can be met.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
Appendix 1
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 42/44
The COMPANY may submit to the Manufacturer actual nozzle loadings from connected piping when these loadings exceed those set forth in paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2 of this Appendix.
Sketch No. 1 - Orientation of the directions of forces and moments
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
Appendix 2
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 43/44
Appendix 2 Manufacturer design report summary
Item number: Designation: Dimensions (m) (∅, TL/TL Length): Capacity (m3):
Position (vertical or horizontal): Design Code: Software used for calculation (name version and date): Internal design pressure (barg): External design pressure (barg): Maximum allowable working pressure (barg): Static head (m) and fluid specific gravity: Design temperature (°C): Minimum design metal temperature (°C): Impact test Code requirement: Testing pressure (barg): Radiography testing: Joint efficiency: Corrosion allowance (mm): PWHT: Maximum allowable flange rating pressure at maximum design temperature (barg): Nozzle loading (user reference specification): External supports loading (Engineering COMPANY reference specification): Wind loading: Seismic loading: Operating weight (kg): Lifting weight (kg): Hydrostatic test weight (kg):
Material Specification
• Shell/heads/cone:
• Pipe:
• Forging:
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/2007
GS EP PVV 211 Rev: 04
Appendix 2
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 44/44
Materials Allow. Stress amb. (MPa)
Allow. Stress designTemp (MPa)
Allow. Stress testingTemp (MPa)
Note: Allowable stress during hydrostatic testing is limited to a maximum of 90% of the yield stress.
Exploration & Production
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
PIPING VALVES VESSELS
GS EP PVV 611
Welding of pressure containing piping and equipment
04 10/05 Addition of “EP” root to GS identification
03 10/03 Change of Group name and logo
02 10/02 New revision
01 03/01 New revision
00 03/01 First issue
Rev. Date Notes
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 2/22
Contents
1. Scope .......................................................................................................................3
2. Reference documents.............................................................................................3
3. Welding qualifications ............................................................................................4 3.1 Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS)........................................................................4 3.2 Welders and welding operators .........................................................................................6 3.3 Welding production tests ...................................................................................................6
4. Welding consumables ............................................................................................6 4.1 Filler materials and fluxes ..................................................................................................6 4.2 Backing rings and consumables inserts ............................................................................7
5. Joint preparation, spacing and alignment ..........................................................10 5.1 Edge preparation .............................................................................................................10 5.2 Cleaning...........................................................................................................................11 5.3 Tack welds.......................................................................................................................11 5.4 Temporary welds .............................................................................................................12
6. Production welding...............................................................................................12 6.1 General requirements ......................................................................................................12 6.2 Welding processes ..........................................................................................................12 6.3 Welding technique ...........................................................................................................13 6.4 Weld contour and finish ...................................................................................................14 6.5 Additional requirements for corrosion resistant overlays .................................................15
7. Preheating..............................................................................................................15
8. Postweld heat treatment.......................................................................................17
9. Inspection and examination .................................................................................18
10. Rejection and repair..............................................................................................20
11. Welder identification.............................................................................................21
12. Records of inspection...........................................................................................22
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 3/22
1. Scope This Specification covers minimum requirements for welding, heat treatment, and non-destructive examination of pressure containing piping and/or equipment such as: pressure vessels, heat exchangers, etc. These requirements also apply to welds attaching skirts, brackets, lugs and other non-pressure parts to such equipment. It is intended to apply to works on fabrication sites such as construction sites or fabrication yards, as well as in Manufacturer's workshops or for Vendor packages (skid assembly, etc.).
This document is intended to be used together with the applicable codes and standards as listed in the following section “Reference documents”.
2. Reference documents The reference documents listed below form an integral part of this General Specification. Unless otherwise stipulated, the applicable version of these documents, including relevant appendices and supplements, is the latest revision published at the EFFECTIVE DATE of the CONTRACT.
Any code or Government regulations which may be listed in the Project Specifications, in the requisition, or in the Purchase Order shall have precedence except where this Specification is more stringent.
Any divergence between any of the Contractual Reference Documents, or between this specification and any other Contractual Reference Document, shall be reported to the COMPANY for decision. In such a case, and unless otherwise agreed or decided by the COMPANY, it is understood that the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Pressure containing piping and equipment are designed, manufactured and tested according to one of the following documents which is referred to as “the Code” in the present specification.
In addition, all welding, heat treatment and tooling shall also conform to the applicable provisions of this Specification and to the requirements of Project Specifications.
Standards
Reference Title
EN 10204 Metallic Products - Type of inspection documents
Professional Documents
Reference Title
Not applicable
Regulations
Reference Title
Not applicable
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 4/22
Codes
Reference Title
ASME Section II Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Materials
ASME Section VIII Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Divisions 1 and 2
ASME B 31.3 Process Piping
PD 5500 Unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
CODAP French Code for unfired pressure vessels
AWS A 5.11 Weld Wire Specification
Other documents
Reference Title
Not applicable
Total General Specifications
Reference Title
GS EP PVV 612 Piping and Equipment subject to severe sour service. Metallurgical and welding requirements
GS EP PVV 614 Welding of duplex and superduplex stainless steels
GS EP PVV 615 Welding of UNS 31254 alloy
GS EP PVV 616 Welding of titanium pipes and fittings
GS EP PVV 617 Welding of 3 ½ % nickel
GS EP PVV 618 Fabrication of alloy UNS 06625 grade 1 materials
GS EP PVV 620 Specification for fabrication and welding of piping systems in cupronickel and associated materials
GS EP PVV 622 Piping and Equipment subject to intermediate sour service. Metallurgical and welding requirements
3. Welding qualifications
3.1 Welding Procedures Specifications (WPS) a) The Manufacturer shall submit in his tender evidence of his ability to qualify welding
procedures for each piping or equipment. This evidence shall be based on previous experience and qualification test results.
b) All welds including weld repairs shall be supported by a relevant WPS. All WPS shall be in writing and shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the applicable code. All supporting PQR shall be witnessed, or at least certified, by a recognised inspection authority.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 5/22
c) All WPS, including their qualification test records (PQR) shall be submitted to the Engineering Company for approval prior to starting fabrication, and this submission shall be considered as part of the calculation and fabrication drawing review by the Engineering Company. All test results shall be from specimens representative of the final condition of the equipment, including heat treatment(s) where applicable.
d) Each WPS shall be identified by an unique number. For pressure vessels and other equipment, each WPS shall also be identified on a welding map.
e) The WPS shall state the actual consumable or flux trade name and type as well as the code designation.
f) Procedure tests for all welding processes shall be qualified using the same welding consumables and flux as will be used on the actual item. A change from one Manufacturer's consumable or flux to that from another Manufacturer, or change of type or grade from the same Manufacturer, shall require requalification for the following materials:
• Carbon steel materials in sour wet service
• Carbon steel materials subject to post well heat treatment with impact test requirements
• Any materials in cryogenic service (i.e. at temperature below minus 46°C)
• Duplex stainless steels
• Nickel alloys.
g) For inert Gas Tungsten Arc (GTAW) and Inert Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW or FCAW), the qualification records shall include the composition and flow rate of inert gas shielding and backing when used. For Submerged Arc Welding (SAW), the qualification record shall include the current arc intensity and voltage, and the travel speed for each weld run.
For Gas Metal Arc process (GMAW or FCAW), the records shall include the power sources, inductance setting, electrode diameter and extension, current and voltage, wire feed rate and travel speed.
h) Tack welds shall be made to a qualified welding procedure that has been approved by the Engineering Company and by approved welders. Tack welds shall be completely removed prior to welding. Fit-up lugs and strong backs and other temporary attachments shall be attached using a qualified procedure approved by the Engineering Company and shall be welded by approved welders.
i) Procedure qualifications for weld overlay deposits shall include the complete chemical analysis of the overlay. Specimens for chemical analysis shall be taken on the final weld layer. The weld metal chemistry shall be within the nominal range specified for the alloy.
Qualification of overlays on tubes and fittings shall be made on same materials of the smallest size intended to be qualified and in the same welding position.
The procedure qualification tests shall include:
• Dye penetrant examination of the completed weld
• Side bend tests and longitudinal face bend tests for weld metal soudness examination. Excessive cracking shall be cause for rejection. Cracks shall not exceed four per specimen nor shall they exceed 1.6 mm in each length. Cracks corners are not considered
• Photomacrograph.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 6/22
3.2 Welders and welding operators Welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the applicable Code prior to fabrication. Records shall be submitted to the Inspection Agency for approval. Alternative qualifications may be accepted subject to the Inspection Agency approval.
Welding operators and welder qualifications shall be valid for one year from last qualification performance date, beyond which requalification is required.
However, a validity period of two years may be considered if sufficient evidence is shown that the related welder has regularly used the same welding process and materials with no interruption exceeding six months.
Welders and welding operators are subject to requalification when the quality of their work, during fabrication, appears to be below the requirements of this Specification.
3.3 Welding production tests When required, production tests representative of each material and welding procedure for main seams shall be performed according to contractual documents requirements.
Test coupons shall be of sufficient length to allow for all mechanical tests to be taken.
Test coupons shall be welded attached to the part being welded where possible and shall reflect the actual welding and heat treatment conditions of the piping or equipment.
Mechanical tests and acceptance criteria shall be the same as required for welding procedure qualifications.
4. Welding consumables
4.1 Filler materials and fluxes
4.1.1 Selection of filler materials and fluxes Welding consumables or combination of them used for the work shall produce welds with strength and ductility properties (especially notch toughness) in the final heat treated condition (if applicable) at least equal to the minimum specified equivalent properties of the base material. For welding carbon steel materials with minimum specified yield strength of 60,000 psi or 420 MPa and above, the selected consumables shall produce welds with tensile strength property not exceeding by more than 25% the specified minimum tensile strength properties, measured at the time of welding procedure qualification tests on an all-weld tensile test specimen taken from the weld metal.
a) For carbon steel materials, EN 10204 type 2.2 test reports shall be submitted to the Inspection Agency for all consumables and shall be available at site at the time of welding. For all other materials, EN 10204 type 3.1.B inspection certificates shall be submitted to the Inspection Agency for all consumables and shall be available at site at the time of welding.
b) Filler metal for welding similar materials shall be as shown in Table 1. 9% Ni materials shall be welded using filler materials complying with one of the following classifications of the AWS A 5.11: ENi Cr Fe - 3, or ENi Cr Mo - 3. Guaranteed strength levels are required for mechanical design.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 7/22
c) Filler metals for welds joining dissimilar materials shall be in accordance with Table 2. Filler metals for combination of materials other than those shown in Table 2 shall be submitted to the COMPANY for approval. Welds joining carbon steel materials of different grades shall give the same strength as that specified for the higher grade of material and shall have ductility and notch toughness properties equal to the higher values specified for the grades of steel being joined.
d) In welding processes other than SMAW or FCAW, the bare filler wire shall contain all the alloying elements; no elements shall be added via the flux.
e) All welding products shall be used within the limits recommended by their Manufacturer and the welding variables used for fabrication shall be within the range used for the procedure qualification.
4.1.2 Supply Low hydrogen electrodes and fluxes shall be supplied in sealed moisture proof containers.
4.1.3 Storage Electrodes, filler wires and fluxes shall be kept clean, dry and properly stored according to Supplier’s recommendations. Storage of open containers shall be in accordance with Supplier's instructions but at a minimum temperature of 75°C in any case. No electrodes, filler wires or fluxes that are damaged, damp, greasy or oxidised may be used.
Manufacturer's facilities shall include a temperature and humidity controlled welding consumable and flux store, including holding and drying ovens.
Low hydrogen electrodes and fluxes shall be placed in a holding oven and held at a minimum temperature of 150°C for at least one hour prior to use. Welding electrodes shall be issued for production from holding ovens only and shall be placed in heated quivers capable of maintaining a minimum temperature of 70°C. After four hours, the remaining unused electrodes in the quivers shall be placed in a drying oven and held at 250-300°C for four hours or as recommended by the Supplier if at a higher temperature, and then transferred to a holding oven prior to reissue.
Low hydrogen electrodes which have been in direct contact with water shall be definitely rejected and removed from the fabrication site.
4.2 Backing rings and consumables inserts Permanent backing rings and consumable inserts shall not be used. Temporary backing rings may be used after approval of the Engineering Company and only if they are made of the same material that has to be welded; in such a case, at least the two first layers of passes shall be gouged out after completion of the weld, and rewelded. Other technique shall require the specific COMPANY prior approval.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 8/22
Table 1 - Filler metal for welds joining similar materials
Covered electrodes Welding rods Base material
ASME spec Preferred electrode Alternative Electrode ASME Spec Classification
(1) SFA5.1 E70XX (3, 4, 9) E60XX (3, 4) (6, 7, 8) - Carbon Steel
(2) SFA5.1 E70XX (3, 4, 9) E80XX (6, 7, 8) -
Carbon-molybdenum SFA5.3 E70XX-A1 - (5) -
3 1/2 nickel SFA5.5 E8018-C2 E8016-C2 (5, 10, 11) -
1/2 Cr - 1/2 Mo SFA5.5 E8018-B2L E8015-B2L (15) (5, 11, 13, 15) 0.05 C max
1 Cr - 1/2 Mo SFA5.5 E8018-B2L E8015-B2L (15) (5, 11, 13, 15) 0.05 C max Low
Chromium Ferritic Steels
1 1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo SFA5.5 E8018-B2L E8015-B2L (15) (5, 11, 13, 15) 0.05 C max
Ferritic Stainless Steels
AISI Type 410S SFA5.4 Inco-Weld A Inconel 182
E410-15 0.05 C max (14)
Inconel 82 or SFA5.9
ER410 0.05 C max
AISI Type 304L SFA5.4 E308L-15 E308L-16 SFA5.9 ER308L
AISI Type 321 SFA5.4 E347-15 E347-16 SFA5.9 ER347
AISI Type 316L SFA5.4 E316L-15 E316L-16 SFA5.9 ER316L
AISI Type 309S SFA5.4 E309-15 E309-16 SFA5.9 ER309
AISI Type 310S SFA5.4 E310-15 E310-16 SFA5.9 ER310
Austenitic Stainless Steels
Alloy 800, 800H SFA5.11 (12) - SFA5.14 (12)
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys SFA5.10 - - SFA5.10 -
Aluminium bronze SFA5.6 EcuAl-A2 (16) - SFA5.7 (16) ERCuAl-A2 (16)
Phosphor bronze SFA5.6 ECuSn-A ECuSn-C SFA5.7 ERCuSn-A
Alloy 600 - (12) - - (12)
Nonferrous metals and alloys
70 Cu - 30 Ni 90 Cu-10 Ni SFA5.6 ECuNi (16) - SFA5.7 (16) ERCuNi (16)
Notes to Table 1 (Numbers in parentheses in Table 1 refer to the following notes):
1. Minimum specified ultimate strength not exceeding 420 MPa or 60,000 Psi.
2. Minimum specified ultimate tensile strength greater than 420 Pa or 60,000 Psi.
3. Low hydrogen electrodes and fluxes, or a low hydrogen weld process shall be used where any of the following requirements or conditions apply:
• Impact testing of weld metal
• The carbon content of the base material exceeds 0.22%
• The base material thickness exceeds 12 mm
• The specified minimum yield strength of the base material exceeds 260 MPa.
4. The following classifications are not acceptable for use in pressure containing welds: E6012, E6013, E6022, EXX14 and EXX24. However, these classifications may be used for tank roof and bottom fillet welds after prior approval of the COMPANY.
5. Where no ASME material specification exists for wire or rods, wire or rods of the same nominal composition as the base material with substantially neutral flux or inert gas may be used if they have been qualified in accordance with the applicable code and specification requirements.
6. Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW) wire shall conform to ASME SFA 5.18 and 5.20.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 9/22
7. Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) wire and flux shall conform to ASME SFA 5.17 or SFA 5.23; however, equivalence under these standards shall not be considered adequate for substitution between different Manufacturers or between a single Manufacturer's grades without requalification.
8. For Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW), ASME SFA 5.18 ER70S-2 is the preferred welding wire.
9. ASME SFA 5.1 E6010 welding electrode is acceptable for the root pass in piping welding only, if the procedure has been qualified to the appropriate code and specification requirements.
10. Alternatively, E7016-C2 welding electrodes or austenitic filler materials may be used dependant upon the minimum design temperature and toughness requirements.
11. Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) wire and flux shall conform to ASME SFA 5.23. Wire and flux combinations shall deposit welds with equivalent composition and equivalent mechanical properties as the base material. Limitations on substitution shall be as specified in Note 7 above.
12. For design temperatures less than 535°C, ENiCrFe-3 or ERNiCr-3 shall be used. For design temperatures of 535°C to 815°C, ENiCrFe-2 or ERNiCr-3 shall be used. For design temperatures greater than 815°C, ENiCrMo-3 or ERNiCrMo-3 shall be used.
13. For gas tungsten arc (GTAW) and Gas Metal Arc (GMAW) welding processes, rods and wire shall conform to ASME SFA 5.28).
14. Type E309-15, E309-16 or ER309 with 0.065 minimum carbon content may be used in some design conditions with advance approval of the COMPANY (not to be used in cyclic service).
15. For chromium-molybdenum steel, other filler materials such as Inconel 82 and 182, or Inco-Weld A, may be used for specific services, subject to the COMPANY approval.
16. For information only, as for cupronickel and associated materials, filler material shall comply with the COMPANY specification GS EP PVV 620 "Specification for fabrication and welding of piping systems in cupronickel and associated materials". Brazing (silver brazing) may also be considered, and, according to the specification GS EP PVV 620, is mandatory in some circumstances.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 10/22
Table 2 - Filler metal for welds joining dissimilar materials
Base material number Base material number Base material type
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 12 13 14 15 16
1 Carbon Steel A D B X B C C C C N B B
2 Carbon-Molybdenum Steel D X X B C C C C N B B
3 3 ½ % Nickel Steel E X X B B B B B B B
4 9% Nickel Steel B X B B B B B B B
5 AISI Type 410 S B B B B B B B B
8 AISI Type 304 L K H L C N B B
9 AISI Type 321 H H C N B B
12 AISI Type 316 L M C N B B
13 AISI Type 309 S C N B B
14 AISI Type 310 S N B B
15 Incoloy 825 B B
16 Inconel 625 I
Filler material AWS classification:
• A: E-XX16 or E-XX18
• B: ENiCrFe-2, ERNiCr-3 or ENiCrFe-3 or ENiCrMo-3 or ERNiCrMo-3
• C: E309-15 or E309-16
• D: E7018-A1
• E: E80XX-C1. Alternatively one of following classifications of the AWS A.5.11: ENiCrFe-3 or ENiCrMo-3
• H: E347-15 or E347-16
• I: ENiCrMo-3 or ERNiCrMo-3
• K: E308L-15 or E308L-16
• L: E308L-15 or EE308L-16 or E316L-15 or E316L-16
• M: E316L-15 or E316L-16
• N: E310-15 or E310-16
• X: Not normally authorised (refer to the COMPANY for advice).
5. Joint preparation, spacing and alignment
5.1 Edge preparation a) Weld bevels shall be suitable for the welding process to be used and shall be as defined in
the applicable qualified welding procedure. The bevel root gap and offset of butted edges shall be as required by the applicable construction code. Whenever necessary, spacing tools
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 11/22
shall be used to ensure proper root opening. Double sided weld joints shall be used whenever possible; joints designed in single-welded butt joints shall be such that full penetration is attained. Double sided weld joints must have the root pass entirely cleaned to sound metal by arc-air gouging, followed by grinding, prior to back-welding.
b) Removable starting and stopping tabs shall be used for longitudinal welding where automatic welding processes are used.
c) Weld bevels shall be made by machining, grinding or thermal cutting, and the surfaces shall be reasonably smooth and true. For Aluminium and aluminium alloys, the final surfaces for welding on shall be finished by machine or filing (not grinding).
On manual flame cutting, metal shall be ground-off to sound, smooth surface to allow for proper welding.
d) Materials which require preheat for welding shall be preheated in the same manner for thermal cutting or arc-air gouging.
e) When arc-air gouging is used, the surface shall have all carburized and hardened surfaces removed by grinding, and all such areas shall be inspected by the Manufacturer's quality control department for conformity prior to welding.
f) All surfaces and edges to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from cracks, tears, gouges and other discontinuities which could adversely affect the quality or strength of the weld.
5.2 Cleaning a) Surfaces to be welded (weld levels and adjacent surfaces) shall be clean and free from paint,
oil, dirt, scale, oxides and other materials detrimental to welding. Cleaning shall be done in a manner that will not lead to contamination of the weld or base metal. Only stainless steel brushes and tools shall be used on stainless steels, nickel and non ferrous materials. Grinding discs containing sulphur (iron sulphite) or other harmful components shall not be used on stainless steels, nickel or non ferrous materials.
Upon completion of each welding pass, the weld shall be cleaned of spatter, slag and flux deposits.
b) For Aluminium or Aluminium alloys, each layer of welding shall be cleaned free of oxides and other foreign material, utilising stainless steel wire brushing, before depositing the next weld beads. Each layer of weld shall be free from irregularities such as high spots, deep crevices, undercutting and porosity. The above can be achieved by filing or chipping and stainless steel wire brushing.
Immediately prior to setting-up and welding, the bevel preparation and at least 20 mm back from the bevel, both internally and externally, shall be stripped free of oxide film by means of filing or stainless steel wire brushing, and further cleaned free of dirt, grease, etc., using a clean cloth or paper towel and a non-toxic solvent. Disc grinding is not permitted. All tools used, i.e. scrapers, wire brushes, files, etc., must be used only on aluminium to prevent contamination by other metals and materials.
5.3 Tack welds All tack welds shall be made in accordance with a previously approved welding procedure and shall be performed by qualified welders. Tack welds shall be of sufficient cross-section and length in order to avoid cracks, especially on high strength steel materials.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 12/22
5.4 Temporary welds Temporary welds for temporary handling attachments, lugs, etc. shall be minimized. When temporary welding is deemed necessary, welding shall be performed with the same approved procedures as for the main fabrication welding.
The temporary welds shall subsequently be removed according to an approved procedure and ground flush with the base material, and then inspected by non-destructive methods (Magnetic Particle or Dye Penetrant). The method of removing attachments shall not injure the metal surface (i.e. they shall not be removed by hammering off).
Any defect found during this inspection shall be removed and repaired by a qualified welder using welding procedures approved by the Engineering Company.
6. Production welding
6.1 General requirements a) Production welding may only start when qualified welding procedures and welders have been
approved by the Engineering Company and the Inspection Agency.
b) Preparation for welding, types and sizes of electrodes, current amperages and voltages used, preheating requirements etc. shall be the same for production welding as those defined in the applicable qualified welding procedures.
c) Adequate precautions shall be taken and suitable equipment shall be available on site in order to protect the welds (and welders) from adverse weather conditions (rain, wind, etc.) at the time of welding. If weather conditions become too severe, welding operations shall be stopped. No welding shall be done on wet base materials. Moisture shall be removed from surfaces to be welded by preheating to 50°C prior to welding. Welding shall not be carried out under heavy wind, unless appropriate shelter is provided for each welder/operator.
d) All surfaces to be welded shall be visually inspected: they shall contain no laminations or other injurious defects.
e) Filler rods for inert gas tungsten arc welding shall be cleaned immediately before use. Electrode wire for inert gas metal arc welding shall be protected from contamination during use and in particular between non-working periods.
f) Peening of welds is not permitted.
g) Structural attachment welds shall be continuous (skip welding not permitted). Fillet welds shall have a minimum leg length of 4 mm.
h) Cleanliness shall be maintained after completion of welding. All stubs, rods, flux and foreign materials shall be removed from the equipment or piping.
i) Stainless steel surfaces shall be restored to their corrosive resistant state. Chemical cleaning procedures, if applicable, shall be subject to the COMPANY approval.
6.2 Welding processes
6.2.1 Approved welding processes All welds shall be made by either the Shielded Metal Arc (SMAW), Gas Tungsten Arc (GTAW), or Submerged Arc (SAW) processes, except that for Aluminium and Aluminium alloys, only the
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 13/22
argon GTAW or GMAW processes shall be used. Any other welding process such as GMAW or FCAW (Flux Cored Arc Welding process) requires the COMPANY prior approval.
6.2.2 Limitations and requirements
6.2.2.1 SMAW Use of SMAW in the downhill direction is restricted to utility lines; any other vertical welding shall be done vertical up.
The maximum width of weave shall not exceed two times the bare electrode (core) diameter.
6.2.2.2 SAW The maximum individual layer thickness for submerged arc welds shall not exceed 10 mm. Recycling of fluxes shall not be permitted for use on materials other than carbon steels.
6.2.2.3 GMAW Gas metal arc welding with solid wire electrodes may only be used in the spray transfer current range. Short circuit transfer process shall not be used.
6.2.2.4 GTAW Thoriated tungsten shall not be used for the non-consumable electrode when welding Aluminium or Aluminium alloys.
6.2.3 Specific requirements Single-side welded butt joints in carbon-molybdenum, chromium-molybdenum steels, stainless steels, nickel alloys and welds located in compressor suction or lubrication oil systems, shall have the root pass and hot pass stainless made by the GTAW process with an appropriate back gas shielding protection. When the GTAW or GMAW processes are used for welding carbon, carbon-molybdenum and low-alloy chromium molybdenum steels with a chromium content not exceeding 1.5%, in other applications than above, the requirement for back gas shielding may be waived, subject to the COMPANY prior approval.
6.3 Welding technique
6.3.1 Welding sequences The Manufacturer shall provide and exert all necessary supervision to ensure that the planned sequences are observed.
a) The sequences in assembling, joining and welding the various parts to be welded shall be scheduled in order to minimise distortion, warpage, shrinkage and accumulations of residual joint stresses in each part of the piping systems or of the equipment being welded.
b) Insofar as practicable, all welds shall be deposited in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding while welding is in progress.
c) The direction of the general progression in welding parts of piping systems shall be from points where the parts are relatively fixed in position with respect to each other towards points where they have a greater relative freedom of movement.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 14/22
d) Joints expected to have significant shrinkage should usually be welded before joints expected to have lesser shrinkage. They should also be welded with as little restraint as possible.
In making welds under conditions of severe external shrinkage restraint, the welding shall be carried-out continuously to completion or to a point that will insure freedom from cracking before the joint is allowed to cool below the minimum specified preheat and interpass temperatures.
e) Where residual joint stresses are not desirable and cannot be avoided, suitable postweld heat treatments shall be performed. The heat treatments shall be made taking into account the recommendations of this Specification.
f) Welded joints shall be made by completing each layer before the following layers are deposited.
6.3.2 Heat input control The heat input, in conjunction with the maximum preheat and interpass temperatures, shall be restricted to the maximum values shown in the relevant WPS and PQR for the following materials:
• Austenitic and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels
• Nickel alloys
• Quenched and tempered carbon steels
• Carbon steels when impact tested at temperatures of minus 30°C and below.
The following parameters shall be carefully checked:
• Preheat temperature
• Minimum and maximum interpass temperatures
• Amperage and voltage
• Welding travel speed.
The Manufacturer shall have available at the work site suitable equipment to measure these important variables (e.g. contact thermometer, etc.).
Accuracy of parameters readings:
• Temperature ± 10°C
• Amperage and voltage ± 5%.
6.4 Weld contour and finish
6.4.1 Flux and slag removal Weld beads shall be contoured to permit complete fusion at the sides of the bevel and to minimise slag inclusions. Flux, slag, and weld spatters shall be completely removed from weld beads and from the surface of completed welds and adjoining base material. The flux removal shall be done in a manner that will not contaminate or overheat the weld or adjoining base material.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 15/22
6.4.2 Weld reinforcement Weld reinforcement and finish shall be as required by the applicable Code, except that undercutting of the base metal shall not be permitted. Internal protrusion shall not exceed the reinforcement thickness specified by the applicable Code. Weld finish shall not impair the interpretation of NDT results.
6.4.3 Weld surfaces Weld surfaces shall be free of cracks, porosity, slag inclusions and other defects indicative of poor workmanship.
6.4.4 Arc strikes Arc strikes outside weld bevels shall be avoided. Should this occur, however, the deposit shall be carefully removed by grinding and the area shall be 100% examined by magnetic particle (on magnetic materials) or dye penetrant (on non magnetic materials). Repairs shall be in accordance with this Specification.
6.5 Additional requirements for corrosion resistant overlays • For weld overlays, there shall be no less than two layers of corrosion-resistant weld metal
However, a single layer overlay may be submitted to the COMPANY approval together with the use of the ESW (Electro Slag Welding) process exclusively.
For stabilised or low-carbon 18/8 type Cr-Ni austenitic stainless steel cladding, the first layer of deposited weld metal shall be 309 type Cr-Ni austenitic stainless steel. Subsequent layers of deposit shall be of the matching grade of the clad material.
• When joining integrally clad plate
- The clad layer shall be stripped for a minimum distance of 10 mm from the bevel and the base material shall be etched with nitric acid to assure complete removal of cladding material
- Removal of cladding shall not reduce the base material thickness below the design thickness
- Preparations of local repair cavities in overlay welds which penetrate the base material more than 10% in thickness or 3 mm, whichever is the smaller, shall have the base metal rewelded with a relevant approved welding procedure.
7. Preheating The following requirements shall apply in addition to those specified in the applicable Code. In case of discrepancy, the more stringent requirement shall apply, unless otherwise agreed by the COMPANY prior to qualification of the welding procedures. Preheat temperatures higher than those specified herein may be required during the qualification tests in order to meet contractual requirements such as hardness levels, or to prevent from cold cracking (particularly in the case of highly restrained welds).
The preheating which has been qualified in the applicable WPS shall apply not only to welding, but also to all thermal operations such as thermal cutting, arc-air gouging, and also tack-welding.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 16/22
In weld assembly of dissimilar or different base materials, preheat temperature shall be the highest of those which are requested for each material.
a) For carbon steel and low alloy carbon steels, preheat temperatures shall not be less than:
• 50°C: When only moisture removal is required. When moisture removal is not applicable, minimum temperature of metal shall be 0°C for low hydrogen electrodes and 10°C for other types
• 100°C: When the base material thickness exceeds 25 mm, or when the carbon equivalent exceeds 0.420.
Note: Carbon equivalent CE is to be calculated from the IIW formula:
15CuNi
5VMoCr
6Mn CCE +
+++
++=
b) Preheat temperatures for other ferritic materials shall be as shown in Table 3.
Table 3 - Minimum preheat temperatures for ferritic steel materials
Steel Material (Nominal analysis)
Minimum preheat temperature (Degrees Celsius)
Carbon - Molybdenum
1/2 Cr - 1/2 Mo
1 Cr - 1/2 Mo
1 1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo
3 1/2 Ni
9 Ni
100
100
150
150
150 (1)
150
Note (1): For piping welding, preheat at 95°C only is acceptable for thicknesses up to 10 mm.
c) For Aluminium and Aluminium alloys, preheat shall be as follows:
• Prior to welding, the joint shall be heated uniformly to a temperature of 90°C but not more than 120°C
• The above preheat temperature shall be maintained during all welding operations. On heavy sections, it is important that preheat be allowed to "soak" evenly throughout the base metal, so that the through metal temperature is 95-120°C. It is equally important that these temperatures (for preheat and interpass) are not exceeded
• Should the welding be interrupted, the joint preheat temperature shall be maintained if possible. In any case, cooling under insulation is required, and re-heating at original temperature is necessary before welding resumes.
d) For austenitic stainless materials, preheating is not required.
e) The required minimum preheat temperature shall be applied to the whole length of joint to be welded and shall be maintained until the weld is completed. Application of preheat when using gas burners shall avoid deposition of carbon. The minimum preheat temperature shall be established for a sufficient distance either side of the joint to avoid unsatisfactory thermal gradient. This distance shall not be less 75 mm each side of the joint.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 17/22
f) The preheat temperature shall be measured on the face opposite to that being heated when possible. When this is not possible, allowance shall be made for temperature equalisation, e.g. remove heat source and allow period of one minute for each 25 mm thickness of material to elapse, before measuring temperature.
g) Measurement of preheat and interpass temperatures shall be done by temperature indicating crayons, contact pyrometer or other approved method of temperature measurement. Whatever method to be used shall be stated on the welding procedure qualification and subject to approval by the Engineering Company. Maximum and minimum temperatures shall be specified. Temperature indicating crayons shall not be applied to surfaces where weld metal is to be deposited.
8. Postweld heat treatment a) Postweld heat treatment shall be in accordance with the applicable Code. Additionally, the
following shall apply:
• Post Weld Heat Treatment of ferritic materials shall conform to Table 4 as a minimum
• No Post Weld Heat Treatment shall be performed on Austenitic Stainless Steel materials
• Postweld heat treatment of field welds in chromium-molybdenum steel made with Inconel type filler metal may be omitted subject to the COMPANY approval.
b) Post Weld Heat Treatment procedures and temperatures shall be carefully controlled and recorded. Heat treatment charts shall be submitted to the Inspection Agency. In case the heat treatment is sub-contracted in a workshop not belonging to the actual Manufacturer of the vessel, the Manufacturer shall witness the heat treatment operation at least during the period of time when the temperature is above 300°C, and shall sign the heat treatment charts.
Table 4 - Post Weld Heat Treatment for carbon steels and ferritic alloy materials*
Material (Nominal analysis)
Minimum socking temperature (Degrees Celsius)
Carbon steel
Carbon - Molybdenum
1/2 Cr - 1/2 Mo
1 Cr - 1/2 Mo
1 1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo
3 1/2 Ni
9 Ni
600
620
620
650
650
565
565
* Does not apply to normalised and tempered or quenched and tempered materials. Postweld heat treatment temperatures of such materials shall not exceed the tempering temperature of the base material less 20°C and shall be such that the mechanical properties are not less than the minimum specified.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 18/22
Notes:
1. Temperature of any part of weldment during post weld heat treatment shall not be less than values shown herein. Sufficient thermocouples shall be properly attached to the workpiece so as to accurately indicate metal temperatures reached.
2. Maximum temperature of any part of weldment during post weld heat treatment shall not be more than 25°C over the minimum values shown herein unless otherwise approved by the COMPANY.
9. Inspection and examination a) Examination of welds shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and standards, the
Project specifications and this Specification. All related procedures shall be issued by the Manufacturer to the Inspection Agency for approval. These procedures shall be qualified prior to fabrication start.
b) Radiographic inspection
• Radiographic inspection of welds may be performed with gamma rays for piping only. In all other applications, X-rays shall be used exclusively, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the COMPANY
• Films shall be carefully identified. The markings shall not be placed on welds and shall include weld number, line identification and welder's symbol
• Radiographic inspection must be done by X-rays using the European standard EN 584-1 category C3 (or better) quality films (Industrex MX125 or equivalent). However, and subject to prior written approval of the COMPANY Technology Division, radiography may be performed using gamma rays provided Cen 58-1 category 2 (or better) quality films are used (Industrex M or equivalent)
Other standards for film quality (like ISO 5579, ASTM E 1815, or others) shall not be used for this purpose, as they are in general less accurate in film classification than Cen 584-1. Equivalence of films recognised by the COMPANY Technology Division is given on Table 5 hereafter:
Table 5 - Equivalence of films recognised by the COMPANY
Film type EN 584-1 category recognised by the
COMPANY Type of radiographic examination related
INDUSTREX MX 125 C3 X-rays only
AGFA D5 C3 X-rays only
FUJI IX80 C3 X-rays only
INDUSTREX M C2 Gamma rays or X-rays
AGFA D4 C2 Gamma rays or X-rays
FUJI IX50 C2 Gamma rays or X-rays
• Sensitivity of films shall be verified by the use of wire-type Image Quality Indicator (IQI) placed transversely to the weld on the source side, for each exposure.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 19/22
The sensitivity maximum acceptable values, as a function of thicknesses examined, are given in the following table, except where more stringent code requirements apply:
Table 6 - Image quality indicator sensitivities
Specimen thickness (mm)
IQI sensitivity (%, maximum value)
3 6
12.5 25 40 50 75
100 150
4.0 3.0 2.4 1.7 1.5 1.3 1.1 1.0 0.9
• Single-film viewing shall be used, and the film density shall be in the range of 2.5 to 3.5. For those instances where the variable thickness makes single film impracticable, with the Inspection Agency approval, double film viewing may be used. For the double film technique, the film density shall be in the range of 2 to 3.5 for the double film combination or each individual film. Higher densities (up to 4.0) may be acceptable if adequate viewing and satisfactory interpretation of higher density film are permitted by the viewing equipment
• The geometrical unsharpness shall not exceed 0.2 mm unless otherwise approved by the Inspection Agency in particular cases
• Radiography of welds in pipe having a nominal diameter of 3" or less may be performed by the elliptical projection technique. At least two separate exposures are required at locations 90° apart
• Where there is no internal access, radiographs of welds in pipe shall be double wall technique with a minimum of two shots up to 4" in diameter and three shots over 4" in diameter and only that portion of the weld on the film side of the pipe (opposite to the radiation-source side) shall be interpreted. Because of the variation in pipe diameters, wall thicknesses and source-to-film distances, it may be necessary to take more than the minimum number of radiographs to properly examine the entire circumference of a weld.
c) Magnetic particle examination shall be performed by the electro-magnet method. The prods method shall not be used because this equipment could produce arc strikes on the pieces to be tested.
d) The extent of inspection shall be in accordance with the contractual requirements and shall not be less than the following:
• All welds shall be 100% visually inspected after completion and before any the NDT technique is applied.
• Welds of a size or type preventing conclusive radiograph images (this does not apply to welds in pressure retaining service including nozzle welds), such as some types of branch
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 20/22
connections and fillet welds, shall be given a magnetic particle examination. For non-magnetic materials and nickel alloys, a liquid penetrant examination shall be used. Internal surfaces shall be examined where accessible.
• When welds in pressure-containing equipment of chromium-molybdenum materials are subject to 100% radiography, the welds shall also be examined inside (when accessible) and outside by the magnetic particle method after post weld heat treatment.
• The attachment welds between structural components and pressure parts shall be either dye penetrant or magnetic particle examined.
For heat-treated components, this shall be done after post weld heat treatment.
• All pressure-containing equipment, irrespective of material, shall have all nozzle and reinforcing pad attachments and attachments to pressure parts welds examined by the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant method. Inspection shall be performed before and after post weld heat treatment both outside and inside where accessible.
• For spot radiographed equipment, radiographic examination shall not be less than 10% of the weld length as well as 100% of well crossings.
e) When radiographic examination is required and is not practicable, ultra-sonic examination plus magnetic particle inspection may be considered as an alternate subject to the COMPANY approval. Dye penetrant inspection may also be used to replace MPI when deemed necessary, subject to the COMPANY approval.
f) For clad welds or weld overlays, all welded surfaces shall be 100% inspected by dye penetrant inspection. Linear defects or pin holes are not acceptable.
g) Tungsten inclusions in welds (when using the GTAW process) are not permitted and shall be repaired even if small in size or in quantity, including if located in the root pass.
10. Rejection and repair Indications or imperfections that are outside the limits of the applicable codes and standards, this Specification, Project Specifications or other requirements stated on the Purchase Order, shall be cause for rejection and the Manufacturer shall take such remedial action as is necessary to secure acceptance. Such re-work shall be subject to the Inspection Agency approval and shall be at the sole expense of the Manufacturer.
Complete repair of a weld shall include removal of the weld, bevelling of new edges, and re-welding.
When welding is judged to be unsatisfactory by the Inspection Agency, the welder or welder operator responsible for the work shall be suspended from welding and all his work examined by non-destructive means. Welding found to be unacceptable by the Inspection Agency shall be repaired. The welder or welder operator may be re-assigned only after additional training, the completion of satisfactory re-qualification tests, and with the approval of the Inspection Agency.
All repairs shall be documented and shall be included in the Manufacturer's data book. Documentation on repairs shall include the following (for each repair):
• Location and layout of defect
• Nature of defect and means of detection used (NDO)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 21/22
• Repair work actually performed (defect removal method, WPS used)
• NDE performed and results obtained during and after repair.
Repairs shall be advised to the Inspection Agency; the repair method, the welding procedure and welder qualifications, etc., shall be in accordance with this Specification and shall be approved by the Inspection Agency before any repair being initiated. This approval must be based on qualification testing (PQR) supporting a specific WPS for each type of repair.
Welds containing cracks shall be subject to additional non-destructive testing (Ultrasonic or Magnetic Particle) and then, the extent of repair shall be decided by the Inspection Agency. Repair welding will only be permitted after consideration of the nature and cause of cracking.
Unacceptable defects shall be removed by chipping, grinding, machining or air-arc gouging. Where air-arc gouging is used, all carbon, cooper and other debris, including carburized metal, shall be removed by grinding or other mechanical methods approved by the Inspection Agency. Oxygen gouging of quenched and tempered steels or other high strength steels is not permitted.
For partial repairs, the cut-out portion shall be sufficiently deep and long to remove the defect. At the ends and sides of the cut, there shall be a gradual taper from the base of the cut to the surface of the weld metal. The width and profile of the cut shall provide adequate access for rewelding.
Special care shall be taken to remove weld defects located at the root in order to obtain an acceptable root gap.
Prior to starting the repair, the repair grooves shall be examined by dye penetrant method, to ensure that all defects are removed.
Preheating (where required) and interpass temperatures shall be maintained during all weld repairs.
Repairs on already post well heat treated components shall be subject to a new post well heat treatment under the same conditions and rules.
All repaired welds shall be re-inspected in accordance with this specification at the Manufacturer's expense. Moreover, additional radiographs of two welds previously performed by the same welder shall be required at the Manufacturer's expense. These additional two welds shall be selected by the Inspection Agency.
For 3 ½ Ni materials, as well as for austeno-ferritic duplex stainless steels, a second repair of the same area on a given weld shall not be permitted: should a defect be repaired on a previously repaired weld area, the whole weld shall be cut and rewelded after having restaured the base materials to their initial condition (i.e. remove heat affected zones, damaged surfaces, etc.).
For all other welds, only two repairs shall be permitted on the same area of a given weld: should a third repair become necessary, then the whole weld shall be cut as per above.
In any case, the WPS used for these repairs shall be qualified on the same number of succession repairs actually performed.
11. Welder identification In field welding, each qualified welder or welding operator shall have an identification symbol assigned to him and, unless specified otherwise, shall permanently mark each pressure weld
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP PVV 611 Rev: 04
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 22/22
with his identification symbol. If more than one welder welds a joint, each shall apply his symbol in a manner to indicate the part of the joint he welded.
For shop welds, the Manufacturer shall keep a record of the welder(s) employed on each joint.
12. Records of inspection The Manufacturer shall keep a complete and accurate current record of all inspections and their results. These records shall be available for examination by the Inspection Agency at all reasonable times.
Exploration & Production
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
CORROSION
GS EP COR 350
External protection of off-shore and coastal structures and equipment by painting
05 10/05 General review – Addition of "EP" root to GS identification
04 10/04 General review
03 10/03 General review – Change of Group name and logo
02 10/02 Binders coding, stainless and immersed paint systems
01 10/01 General review
00 02/01 First issue
Rev. Date Notes
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 2/150
Contents
1. Scope .......................................................................................................................4
2. Reference documents.............................................................................................4
3. Surfaces to be painted............................................................................................6 3.1 Items not to be painted ......................................................................................................6 3.2 Case of stainless steels .....................................................................................................6 3.3 Painting of fastenings ........................................................................................................7
4. Painting systems.....................................................................................................7 4.1 Reference code for painting systems for offshore and coastal areas................................8 4.2 Approved systems .............................................................................................................8 4.3 Substitution rule .................................................................................................................9 4.4 Colour coding.....................................................................................................................9
5. Certification of personnel.......................................................................................9 5.1 Operators...........................................................................................................................9 5.2 Inspectors ..........................................................................................................................9
6. Technical content of tenders .................................................................................9
7. Surface preparation ..............................................................................................10 7.1 Design and preparation before blasting of surfaces to be painted ..................................10 7.2 Quality of abrasives .........................................................................................................10 7.3 Blast cleaning of carbon steel (AF)..................................................................................10 7.4 Blast cleaning of carbon steel (AF) on automatic production lines ..................................11 7.5 Blast cleaning of stainless steels (AI) ..............................................................................11 7.6 Surface preparation of galvanised steel (AG)..................................................................11 7.7 Preparation of galvanised or cadmium plated bichromated surfaces (AB)......................11
8. Paint application ...................................................................................................11 8.1 Procurement and storage ................................................................................................11 8.2 Samples for QA/QC purposes .........................................................................................12 8.3 Qualification of application procedure for each system ...................................................12 8.4 Kick off meeting ...............................................................................................................12 8.5 Application .......................................................................................................................12
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 3/150
8.6 Repairs ............................................................................................................................13
9. Checks, inspection and acceptance....................................................................14 9.1 Checks.............................................................................................................................14 9.2 Inspection test plan..........................................................................................................15 9.3 COMPANY inspection .....................................................................................................15 9.4 Provisional acceptance....................................................................................................15 9.5 Guarantee........................................................................................................................15 9.6 Final acceptance..............................................................................................................15
10. Technical file .........................................................................................................15 Appendix 1 List of approved SUPPLIERS ............................................................................17 Appendix 2 List of systems ...................................................................................................18 Appendix 3 SUPPLIERS' systems........................................................................................21 Appendix 4 Colour coding...................................................................................................145
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 4/150
1. Scope This General Specification defines the technical requirements for the execution of painting works of new built offshore or coastal structures and equipment. The specification is based on the use of high durability painting systems for facilities whose design life is anticipated to be more than 15 years.
This specification does not cover painting systems for temporary equipment or equipment with design life less than 10 years, and for which alternative painting systems shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval.
2. Reference documents Standards
Reference Title
ISO 12944-1 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 1: General introduction
ISO 12944-2 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 2: Classifications of environments
ISO 12944-3 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 3: Design and constructive requirements
ISO 12944-4 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 4: Surface types and preparation
ISO 12944-7 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 7: Execution and supervision of painting work
ISO 12944-8 Paints and varnishes-Corrosion protection of steel structures by paint systems. Part 8: Development of specifications for new and maintenance work
ISO 20340 Paints and varnishes-Performance requirements for protective paint systems for offshore and related structures.
ISO 11124-2 to 4 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Specifications for metallic blast-cleaning abrasives
ISO 11125-1 to 7 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Methods for testing metallic blast-cleaning abrasives
ISO 11126-7, 8, & 10 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Specifications for non-metallic blast-cleaning abrasives: fused aluminium oxide, olivine sand, and garnet
ISO 11127-1 to 7 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Methods for testing non-metallic blast-cleaning abrasives
ISO 8501-1 to 3 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Visual assessment of surface cleanliness.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 5/150
Reference Title
ISO 8502-1 to 4 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Tests for the assessment of surface cleanliness
ISO 8502-6 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Tests for the assessment of surface cleanliness: extraction of soluble contaminants for analysis-The Bresle method
ISO 8502-9 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Tests for the assessment of surface cleanliness: Field method for conductometric determination of water-soluble salts.
ISO 8503-1 to 4 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Surface profile of abrasive blast-cleaned steel
ISO 8504-1 to 3 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products. Methods for surface preparation
ISO 1513 Paints and varnishes. Examination and preparation of samples for testing
ISO 19840 Paints and varnishes. Determination of dry film thickness. Non-destructive magnetic flux method
ISO 2409 Paints and varnishes. Cross-cut test
ISO 4624 Paints and varnishes. Pull-off test
ISO 4628-1 to 6 Evaluation of paint and varnish defects. Designation of intensity, quantity and size of common types of defect
ISO 9223 Corrosion of metals and alloys. Atmospheres’ corrosivity. Classification
ASTM D 4752 Standard test method for measuring MEK resistance of ethyl silicate (inorganic) Zinc-rich primer by solvent rub
ASTM D 4940 Standard test method for conductimetric analysis of water soluble ionic contamination of blasting abrasives
Professional Documents
Reference Title
RAL 840 HR Colors standard
ACQPA "Association pour la Certification et la Qualification en Peinture Anticorrosion". Painting systems certified by ACQPA. www.acqpa.com
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 6/150
Regulations
Reference Title
Not applicable Codes
Reference Title
Not applicable
Total General Specifications
Reference Title
GS EP COR 352 Internal protection of equipment by painting
3. Surfaces to be painted All surfaces shall be painted using the relevant specified system, except when otherwise stipulated hereafter.
3.1 Items not to be painted Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall not be painted:
• Galvanised steel gratings
• Concrete structures
• Plastic and plastic coated materials, provided their resistance to UV has been demonstrated, and colour coding is not necessary.
• Non ferrous materials such as 90-10 and 70-30 copper nickel alloys, monel, aluminium bronze, and nickel alloys when not thermally insulated.
• Machined surfaces
3.2 Case of stainless steels When painting is requestesd as specified hereunder; only piping, pipelines and vessels or other pressure containing equipement are concerned.
3.2.1 Under thermal insulation For temperatures ranging from 25 to 150°C (maximum operating temperature), system P05 second shall be used, whatever the stainless steel type.
Below 25°C, system P05 shall be applied whatever the stainless steel type.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 7/150
3.2.2 Without thermal insulation The following applies:
Stainless steel type General case Persian Gulf and Gulf of Thailand
Paint system
AISI 304, 304L and 321
Painted in all cases Painted in all cases P05 for T<80°C
P05 second for 80°C<T<150°C
AISI 316 and 316L Painted for T>50°C Painted in all cases P05 for T<80°C
P05 second for 80°C<T<150°C
AISI 904, duplex and super duplex
Painted for T>100°C Painted for T>100°C P05 second for T<150°C
In all cases, and if necessary, system P13 shall be applied for T>150°C. TSA (Thermally Sprayed Aluminium) can be also used as an alternative.
Zinc containing paints are prohibited on stainless steel.
All stainless steels shall be painted on areas facing carbon steel pipe supports.
3.3 Painting of fastenings For bolting, the following applies :
• Stainless steel: Not painted
• Carbon steel: Primer of system P06 (30 microns of epoxy) applied before installation and the remaining layers (intermediate and finish coat) applied after installation.
For dudgeons, painting (system P06) will be done after installation.
Conditions of execution of the work
4. Painting systems Painting systems are defined according to the following parameters:
• Type of substrate
• Atmosphere or environment
• Minimum and maximum Operating temperatures.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 8/150
4.1 Reference code for painting systems for offshore and coastal areas
4.1.1 Coding system
Part 1: atmosphere or environment
Atmosphere or environment Category of corrosivity
Marine atmosphere -MA C5-M
Buried - EN EN
Immersed – IM IM - 2
Part 2: Substrate
AF Ferritic (carbon) steel or cast iron
AI Austenitic stainless steels and special alloys
AG Galvanized steels
AB Cadmium-plated bichromated steels
PL Plastics
BE Concretes and similar products
Part 3: Operating temperatures
SNNN/SNNN: two-zone code containing the symbol + or - and three digits (NNN) indicating the minimum and maximum Operating temperatures respectively.
4.1.2 Identification of painting systems Systems are identified as follows:
MA AF +121/+300 XX
Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 System number
4.2 Approved systems The painting systems approved by COMPANY are given in appendix 3. It is emphasised that these painting systems, where relevant, have been subject to certification by ACQPA, according to COMPANY policy and have therefore been subject to extensive corrosion testing.
For painting systems which cannot be certified through the ACQPA procedures (especially high temperature painting systems), the approved panting systems are the result of COMPANY experience and operational feedback.
For SUPPLIERS already approved as per Appendix 1, new systems can be submitted for approval to COMPANY at any time and at SUPPLIERS expenses. In that case, a full qualification programme shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval together with the name of the third party and independent laboratory which is proposed to perform the test programme. COMPANY reserves the right to amend the qualification programme proposed and to witness
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 9/150
the testing at any stage. As a basis for durability testing, ISO 20340 applies. Other testing will be required depending on the concerned area (atmosphere, immersed or not, temperature etc…).
4.3 Substitution rule When selecting a painting system, a system designed to withstand environments with higher corrosivity shall always be applicable to lower corrosivity environments.
4.4 Colour coding Colour coding shall be according to the schedule defined for the project. Generally, colours will be chosen to match those of installations already present in the same block or country.
If the project has no specific requirements, then the colour coding shall be according to Appendix 4.
In any case, the painting works carried out by CONTRACTOR shall include all colour coding and marking required for service identification.
5. Certification of personnel
5.1 Operators Operators shall be individually certified by an approved organization (ACQPA, FROSIO, etc.).
5.2 Inspectors Inspectors shall be individually certified by an approved organization (ACQPA, FROSIO, NACE International minimum level 3, etc.).
6. Technical content of tenders Tenders shall include the following information:
• Proposed paint systems for each category / location of item to be painted,
• Product data sheets,
• Terms and conditions of guarantee,
• A statement showing that all parties involved (CONTRACTOR, SUPPLIER, and APPLICATOR) will be carrying out the work according to the present specification, or if relevant, to the project particular specification. This statement shall also show that the guarantee is jointly underwritten by all parties and specify the durations and performance levels of the guarantee. This statement can consist in either a certificate of homologation by OHGPI (Organisme d’Homologation des Garanties en Peinture Industrielles) or a letter signed by the head office of each party involved.
• Maximum thickness tolerable for each coat and for the full system,
• Surface preparation and painting procedures,
• Inspection test plan with acceptance criteria and frequency of inspection,
• A list of inspection and painting equipment to be used,
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 10/150
• Colours to be used for each item of equipment and for the different coats, in accordance with the colour chart chosen for the project by COMPANY,
• Methods of protection of items to be painted against adverse weather conditions,
• Certificates (ACQPA, FROSIO, NACE, or equivalent) of operators and inspectors.
7. Surface preparation
7.1 Design and preparation before blasting of surfaces to be painted All structures and equipment shall be designed according to ISO 12944 international standard for high durability paint systems.
All sharp edges shall be rounded (minimum radius > 2 mm).
The design of the item to be painted shall be such that it creates no interstice and inaccessible area.
All oil or grease shall be removed by washing the item to be painted with appropriate solvents or any other suitable means before beginning blast-cleaning operations. This includes bolt holes in piping assemblies.
Weld spatter and remains of temporary welds, deposits or surface defects shall be eliminated by appropriate means; removal by deep grinding is subject to COMPANY approval.
All mating surfaces of equipment subject to outdoor exposure shall be coated with the full coating system prior to assemly (saddles, skirts, base plates, olted components, flanges, etc.).
CONTRACTOR shall protect all equipment that is not to be painted or may be affected by the presence of abrasives or paint. Special attention shall be paid to avoid splashes of zinc paint on equipment made of austenitic steels.
7.2 Quality of abrasives Abrasives shall be sealed in watertight packaging. Any product delivered in defective packaging shall be rejected. Products must be stored sheltered from the elements.
Conductivity of abrasives shall be less than 150.10-6 SIEMENS/cm as per ASTM D4940.
The use of copper slag or silica sand is prohibited.
7.3 Blast cleaning of carbon steel (AF) All surfaces to be coated shall be blast-cleaned according to:
• the grade of cleanliness (ISO 8501 standard),
• the surface profile Ra (ISO 8503 standard: roughness meter with adapted cut-off or visio tactile surface profile comparator)
specified for each system in Appendix 3
After blast-cleaning, all dust must be removed using a vacuum cleaner before application of the paint (ISO 8502 – 3).
All blast-cleaned surfaces shall be coated before the deterioration of the "grade of cleanliness". In any case, any surface that has been blast-cleaned shall be coated on the same day.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 11/150
Before painting works commence, checks for the contamination of the surface by salts shall be checked (ISO 8502 – 6 & 9).
The blast cleaning procedure shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval.
7.4 Blast cleaning of carbon steel (AF) on automatic production lines In addition to the requirements of § 7.3:
• All surfaces shall be blast-cleaned to grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501 -1).
• CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the grit selected can achieve the required surface profile. This requirement includes determination of grit mix, as well as quantity and frequency of renewal. Surface profile shall be checked twice per shift and shall record the results.
• Dust level shall be thoroughly checked (ISO 8502 – 3)
The blast cleaning procedure shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval.
7.5 Blast cleaning of stainless steels (AI) Stainless steels shall be segregated, carbon steel supports for storage shall be systematically painted, and lifting equipment shall prevent iron contamination.
Stainless steel surfaces to be coated shall be etched or degreased and blast-cleaned with a non-ferrous and chlorine-free abrasive.
The blast cleaning procedure to be submitted to COMPANY shall include:
• Abrasive composition to obtain a surface roughness of Ra = 10 microns (8 microns acceptable locally).
• Dust level (level 2 maximum of ISO 8502 – 3)
• Substrate contamination checks. ferrous contamination / direct colorimetry method using Prussian blue (potassium ferricyanide) – no surface pollution can be accepted.
7.6 Surface preparation of galvanised steel (AG) Galvanized steel to be coated shall be cleaned, degreased and etched using the product specified in the systems.
7.7 Preparation of galvanised or cadmium plated bichromated surfaces (AB) Galvanized or cadmium-plated bichromated surfaces shall be cleaned and degreased.
8. Paint application
8.1 Procurement and storage The quantities of paint and thinners required to perform the entire job shall be procured before the work commences, except in cases where the shelf life of the product is less than the anticipated duration of the work.
Thinners, solvents, etc. shall be stored in a suitably ventilated fireproofed building, separate from other painting consumables.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 12/150
The products shall be delivered in their original sealed packaging and stored in such conditions as to avoid their degradation (controlled temperature, etc.). The packaging shall be clearly marked with the product description, the batch number, the fabrication date and the expiry date.
The expiry dates from the fabrication dates are:
• For zinc ethyl silicate: 6 months
• For other products: 1 year
• Specific cases: according to manufacturer’s recommendation with COMPANY approval.
8.2 Samples for QA/QC purposes From each batch of products used during the work, the CONTRACTOR shall take two samples to be made available to COMPANY.
8.3 Qualification of application procedure for each system One month before work commences, all the selected systems shall be applied on test plates representative of the structure to be painted. The products used shall be sampled from the same batches than these intended for the works.
The system shall be applied in the presence of the MANUFACTURER of the paint and the OWNER's representative, in climatic conditions that are as similar as possible to worst case conditions that can be foreseen during the work on the construction site. Application shall be performed by the painting specialist who will be responsible for application during the work.
When the painting systems are fully cured, visual inspection and adhesion testing shall be carried out to confirm that the performance of the painting systems meet those specified for each system in Appendix 3.
8.4 Kick off meeting A technical kick off meeting shall be organized by the CONTRACTOR in the presence of COMPANY and MANUFACTURER to define all the details regarding the work, application procedures, and inspection test plan. All the documentation shall be submitted to COMPANY for review prior to this meeting.
SUPPLIER shall provide CONTRACTOR with technical assistance. All recommendations made by SUPPLIER other then these outlined in datasheets or in the present specification shall be supported by a written statement from SUPPLIER head office.
8.5 Application
8.5.1 General Paint shall always be applied to surfaces that are dry, clean and degreased, for both coating on substrate and previous coat.
Painting works shall not proceed if:
• Temperature of the substrate is less than 3°C above the dew point,
• The relative humidity is more than 85% RH (90% RH for inorganic zinc silicates),
• The weather is rainy or foggy, except under shelter, and subject to verification of the atmospheric conditions,
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 13/150
• The minimum or maximum temperature of the ambient atmosphere and the substrate are outwith the limits given in the product data sheets (usually 10 °C for epoxy based paint and 5 °C for acryl-polyurethane topcoat.
CONTRACTOR shall keep a daily record of the dew point, relative humidity, ambient atmosphere and substrate temperatures (all measured before the work commences and twice per shift and when ambient conditions are obviously changing) to ensure that conditions are acceptable. These records shall be kept and made available to COMPANY.
Application shall be by airless spray.
Stripe coats shall be applied by brush to all angles, corners, sharp edges, bolt or rivet heads, etc. with the same product than this to be applied on the surface to be painted. The only exception is inorganic zinc silicates where stripe coats shall be applied using the repair system primer i.e. zinc rich epoxy.
Different colours shall be used for all successive coats of the paint system. The finishing coat of the required colour shall be sufficiently opaque to cover the shade of the undercoat.
The thickness of each coat, including frequency and tolerance shall be checked by the CONTRACTOR according to ISO 19840. The values shall be recorded and made available to COMPANY.
8.5.2 Zinc ethyl silicate During application, the product shall be stirred at all times.
If relative humidity is low, it shall be sprayed with fresh water for at least two hours after application to enhance curing.
Before the subsequent coat is applied, this primer shall be subjected to a MEK test as per ASTM D4752 to ensure that hydrolysis is complete. If complete hydrolysis is not obtained within eight days of application, the coating shall be completely removed and re-applied.
8.5.3 Galvanized or cadmium-plated bichromated bolting All surfaces of the bolting shall be coated. The topcoat shall be applied after assembly is completed.
8.5.4 Painting of fastenings For bolting, the following applies :
• Stainless steel: Not painted
• Carbon steel: Primer of system P06 (30 microns of epoxy) applied before installation and the remaining layers (intermediate and finish coat) applied after installation.
For dudgeons, painting (system P06) will be done after installation.
8.6 Repairs Any defect shall be repaired before the application of further coats. Subject to the agreement of COMPANY, and after determining the type and size of the defects, the following methods of repair shall be applied:
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 14/150
8.6.1 Major defects The paint shall be removed completely by abrasive blast-cleaning and the entire system shall be re-applied.
8.6.2 Minor defects (localized appearance, mechanical damage, scratches, etc.) Subject to the agreement of the SUPPLIER of the product, the system shall be removed by localized blast-cleaning, the edges of the sound coating shall be feathered back about 50 mm, and the repair system shall be applied.
9. Checks, inspection and acceptance
9.1 Checks Throughout the duration of the work, CONTRACTOR's Quality Control department shall check the following points and record the results in its quality control report.
• Construction quality:
- Rounding of corners, sharp edges to 2 mm radius minimum,
- Form, quality and continuity of welds.
• Surface preparation quality:
- Grade of cleanliness: Sa 3 according to ISO 8501,
- Cleanliness: no grease or oil, dust level 2 maximum according to ISO 8502-3.
- Anchoring profile: G medium according to ISO 8502.
• Contamination including chlorides: according to ISO 8502-6 and 9, 30 mg/m² maximum.
• Climatic conditions for application: temperature of substrate at least 3 °C above dew point, maximum humidity 85% RH (90% for inorganic zinc silicates), ambient temperature (>10 °C for epoxy, >5 °C for polyurethane), weather conditions.
• State of curing of primer and of each coat.
• For inorganic zinc silicate: record of spraying with fresh water to enhance hydrolysis (if relevant) and results of MEK test: Level 5 according to ASTM D4752.
• Interval between coats (in accordance to SUPPLIER product datasheets).
• Wet film thickness for each coat immediately after application.
• Number of coats, DFT of each coat and of the final system according to ISO 19840.
• Appearance and colour.
• Adherence
The tests shall be carried out only when the system is completely dry and fully polymerized.
- Systems with DFT less than 200 µm: cross-cut test class 0 according to ISO 2409
- Systems with DFT above 200 µm: pull-off test according to ISO 4624: Unless specified in the system sheet in Appendix 3, the minimum values acceptable are 3 MPa for checks made with mechanical equipment (type Ersad, Satec, or equivalent)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 15/150
and 5 MPa for checks made with hydraulic equipment (Type PAT or equivalent). The equipment must be fitted with a gauge indicating the pulling force.
• Visual inspection results: no defects such as "orange peel", cracking, bubbling, pinholes, runs and sags, blistering, etc.
9.2 Inspection test plan An inspection test plan including all the points in section 9.1 shall be prepared and submitted to COMPANY.
9.3 COMPANY inspection COMPANY inspector shall have free access to storage areas, workshops, yards where the works will be performed. CONTRACTOR shall also provide COMPANY inspector with all office facilities necessary for the execution of his work (telephone, fax, handling equipment, measuring instruments with valid calibration certificates, etc.).
Upon arrival of COMPANY inspector on site, CONTRACTOR shall supply him with all relevant documentation regarding the works to be carried out.
9.4 Provisional acceptance For provisional acceptance, COMPANY shall check that all inspections set out in section 9.1 have been carried out and that all results are satisfactory.
9.5 Guarantee The works shall be covered by a specific guarantee:
• The guarantee shall be jointly underwritten by CONTRACTOR, APPLICATOR, and SUPPLIER.
• Unless otherwise specified in Appendix 3, this guarantee shall be provided for a duration of 5 years.
• The maximum degree of rust shall be Ri2 according to ISO 4628.
• The maximum degree of cracking, blistering, or flaking shall be 3S3 according to ISO 4628.
9.6 Final acceptance An inspection shall be carried out at the end of the guarantee period to determine if any claims are raised.
10. Technical file CONTRACTOR shall hand over a technical file to COMPANY at the end of the works which shall include:
• All inspection reports.
• Provisional acceptance reports.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 16/150
• Guarantee certificates.
• Insurance certificates for the guarantee.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 1
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 17/150
Appendix 1 List of approved SUPPLIERS
SUPPLIER Code Phone No. Fax No. Remarks
AMERON A +33 1 30-71-50-50 +33 1-30-53-49-07 technical.nl@ameron-bv.com
CARBOLINE C +33 1-60-06-55-66 +33 1-60-06-55-70 Carboline.France @stoncor.com
HEMPEL H +33 3-44-08-28-90 +33 3-44-08-28-99 smo@fr.hempel.com
INTERNATIONAL COATINGS I +33 2-35-22-13-50 +33 2-35-22-13-52 edward.grattepanche@uk.akzonobel.com
JOTUN J +33 1-45-19-38-87 +33 1-45-19-38-94 jose.menaches@jotun.com
SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG S +33 4-38-49-94-30 +33 4-38-49-94-39 Frédéric.Coulon@SigmaKalon.com
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 2
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 18/150
Appendix 2 List of systems
Important warning:
• Intervals between coats are given for 20°C and a relative humidity of 60 %.
• For inorganic zinc silicates, interval considers water spray for 2 hours after application.
• Systems have been certified by ACQPA where relevant (website www.acqpa.com)
• Temperatures indicated are minimum /maximum operating temperatures.
Decks
Item Code System Remarks Structures MA AF -010/+080 P01
Floors MA AF -010/+080 P02
Helideck, escape routes of oil producing facilities
MA AF -010/+080 P03
Fire-proofed surfaces Intumescent epoxy MA AF -010/+080
P04
P042nd The painting system must be approved by PFP supplier
Galvanized surfaces MA AG -010/+080 P05 All galvanized surfaces, EXCEPT gratings, stairs and associated galvanized fasteners.
304, 321 SS T<80 °C MA AI -010/+080 P05
Other stainless steels MA AI -010/+080 P05 2nd
Cd/bi Cr and Zn/bi Cr surfaces MA AB -010/+080 P06 Above 80°C, use same system as
adjacent surfaces.
High temperature MA AF +121/+400 P11 Flare type structures
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 2
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 19/150
Jackets
Item Code System Remarks
Zone: 1 (Splash zone) MA AF -010/+080
P07 P07 Snd
(note 1)
Between the crest level of the 100 years wave superimposed on the maximum surge height plus the normal Mean High Water Springs (MHWS) and 3 m below the Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT) or the annual swell, whichever is the greater;
P08
Area from the bottom of the jacket (including buried part) to 2 m above the stability floor.
Boat-landing, Bumpers.
I tubes and J tubes of umbilicals and electrical cables.
Sump caissons (internal and external).
Casings of seawater lift pumps.
Zone: 2 (Immersed zone)
(note 2) MA AF -010/+080
P08 Snd Subsea equipment (wellheads, manifolds, etc.). Top coat shall be light colour.
Zone: 3 (Emerged zone) MA AF -010/+080 P09
Area between the crest level of the 50 years wave superimposed on the maximum surge height plus the normal Mean High Water Springs (MHWS) and the top of the structure.
Notes:
• Note1-If above 80 °C, the splash zone of flare structure shall be cladded with Inconel 625 or Monel K500 or equivalent.
• Note 2- Immersed zone is protected against corrosion by combination of painting and cathodic protection.
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 2
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 20/150
Pressure vessels, piping, and exterior of storage tanks
Item Code System Remarks
Carbon steels, uninsulated
t < 80°C MA AF -010/+080 P01 Extended 1.5 m down inside floating roof tanks
81 < t < 120°C MA AF +081/+120 P10 Including adjacent surfaces
121 < t < 400° MA AF +121/+400 P11 Including adjacent surfaces
Carbon steels, insulated
t < 89°C MA AF -030/+089 P12
90 < t < 200°C MA AF +090/+200 P13
Other
Vessels base structure MA AF -010/+080 P01
Galvanised surfaces, MA AG -010/+080 P05 All galvanized surfaces, EXCEPT gratings, stairs and associated galvanized fasteners
304, 321 SS, T<80 °C MA AI -010/+080 P05
Other stainless steels MA AI -010/+080 P05 2nd Including 304, 321 SS
80 °C<T<120 °C
Cd/bi Cr or Zn/bi Cr surfaces MA AB -010/+080 P06 Above 80°C, use same system
as adjacent surfaces
Machines
Item Code System Remarks
T < 80 °C MA-AF-010/+080 P14 Machinery SUPPLIER system if approved by COMPANY
Rooms
Item Code System Remarks
Opened workshops
MA AF -010/+080 P15 Bulkheads, ceilings
Air conditioned
MA AF -010/+080 P16 Walls, ceilings
Floors MA AF -010/+080 P02
Floors under concrete
MA AF -010/+080 P17
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 21/150
Appendix 3 SUPPLIERS' systems
Coding for type of paint:
Binders Codes Remarks
Acrylic AY
Zinc ethyl silicate ESI
Rich Zinc epoxy EPRZ [Zn] > 80% (ISO 12944-5)
Poor Zinc Epoxy EPZ [Zn] < 80% (ISO 12944-5)
Epoxy EP
Phenolic Epoxy EPPH
Modified Epoxy EPM
Vinylic Epoxy EPVI
Ester Epoxy EPES
Zinc Phosphate Epoxy EPHZ
Tar Epoxy Tar EP
Glass flake Epoxy EPGF
Polyurethane PUR
Polyester PY
Silicone SI
Vinyl-ester VY
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 22/150
System No. P 01 A Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 50 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 23/150
System No. P 02 A Coating Floors SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amercoat 385 GF 200 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 50 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amercoat 385 GF 200 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 24/150
System No. P 03 A Coating Helideck SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 350 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 350 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 25/150
System No. P 04 A Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; concrete type PFP SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amerlock 400 C 150 microns 87 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amerlock 400 C 150 microns 87 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 26/150
System No. P 04 A 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces: Intumescent epoxy SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
5. Remarks When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 27/150
System No. P 05 A Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Etching with Amercoat 59
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 28/150
System No. P 06 A Coating Cadmium or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 29/150
System No. P 07 A Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 375 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 385 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 30/150
System No. P 07 A Second Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 31/150
System No. P 08 A Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 300 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 32/150
System No. P 08 A second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 200 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 200 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 200 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Amerlock 400 GFA 200 microns 91 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 33/150
System No. P 09 A Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 200 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 260 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 34/150
System No. P 10 A Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Amerlock 400 AL 120 microns 85 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amerlock 400 AL 120 microns 85 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Amerlock 400 AL 120 microns 85 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amerlock 400 AL 120 microns 85 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C (Amercoat 450 S)
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 35/150
System No. P 11 A Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate ESI Amercoat 741 125 microns 62 85 4 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate ESI Amercoat 741 125 microns 62 85 4 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 36/150
System No. P 12 A Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Amercoat 385 P 150 microns 71 85 12 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Amercoat 385 P 150 microns 71 85 12 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 37/150
System No. P 13 A Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Amercoat 90 S 150 microns 58 85 24 hours 12 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 90 S 150 microns 58 85 24 hours 12 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Amercoat 90 S 150 microns 58 85 24 hours 12 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 90 S 150 microns 58 85 24 hours 12 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 38/150
System No. P 14 A Coating Machines SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Amercoat 450 S 50 microns 58 85 4 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 39/150
System No. P 15 A Coating Open Rooms SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 40/150
System No. P 16 A Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 41/150
System No. P 17 A Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER AMERON
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Dimetcote 19 60 microns 62 90 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 30 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Amercoat 68 50 microns 70 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Amercoat 71 primer 40 microns 51 85 4 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Amercoat 385 150 microns 71 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 42/150
System No. P 01 C Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 43/150
System No. P 02 C Coating Floors SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1210 250 microns 93 85 4 hours 16 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1210 250 microns 93 85 4 hours 16 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 44/150
System No. P 03 C Coating Helideck SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1210 500 microns 93 85 4 hours 16 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1210 500 microns 93 85 4 hours 16 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 45/150
System No. P 04 C Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Concrete type PFP SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carbomastic 15 150 microns 90 95 48 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carbomastic 15 150 microns 90 95 48 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 46/150
System No. P 04 C 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Intumescent epoxy SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
5. Remarks When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 47/150
System No. P 05 C Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Etching with lithoform No. 2
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 48/150
System No. P 06 C Coating Cadmium or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 49/150
System No. P 07 C Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
40 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 375 microns 88.5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 425 microns 88.5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 50/150
System No. P 07 C Second Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EP Carboguard 193 primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPGF Carboguard 1209 300 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 300 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EP Carboguard 193 primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours Unlimited
Tie-coat EPGF Carboguard 1209 300 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 300 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Carboguard 193 primer (facultative) - Only to protect the grit-blasting if necessary.
Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 51/150
System No. P 08 C Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 890 300 microns 77 85 8 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 890 300 microns 77 85 8 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 52/150
System No. P 08 C second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Carboguard 1209 200 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 200 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Carboguard 1209 200 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Carboguard 1209 200 microns 88,5 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 53/150
System No. P 09 C Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 200 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 250 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 54/150
System No. P 10 C Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Thermaline 400Primer
120 microns 65 85 24 hours 6 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Thermaline 400 Finish coat
120 microns 63 85 24 hours 6 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Thermaline 400Primer
120 microns 65 85 24 hours 6 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Thermaline 400 Finish coat
120 microns 63 85 24 hours 6 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C (Carbothane PU 134)
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 55/150
System No. P 11 C Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate SI Carboline 4631 20 microns 32.5 90 3 hours unlimited
Finish coat SI Carboline 4631 20 microns 32.5 90 3 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate SI Carboline 4631 20 microns 32.5 90 3 hours unlimited
Finish coat SI Carboline 4631 20 microns 32.5 90 3 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 56/150
System No. P 12 C Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Thermaline 400Primer
150 microns 65 85 24 hours 6 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Thermaline 400 Finish coat
150microns 63 85 24 hours 6 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Thermaline 400Primer
150 microns 65 85 24 hours 6 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Thermaline 400 Finish coat
150microns 63 85 24 hours 6 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 57/150
System No. P 13 C Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPES Primer 200 red-brown
60 microns 41 85 30 minutes
unlimited
Intermediate EPES Finish coat 200 Alu 60 microns 37 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPES Primer 200 red-brown
60 microns 41 85 30 minutes
unlimited
Intermediate EPES Finish coat 200 Alu 60 microns 37 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 58/150
System No. P 14 C Coating Machines SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Carbothane 134 50 microns 57 80 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 59/150
System No. P 15 C Coating Open Rooms/Workshops SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 60/150
System No. P 16 C Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 61/150
System No. P 17 C Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER CARBOLINE
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Carbozinc 11 60 microns 61.5 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
30 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Carboline 658 P 50 microns 56 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Carboguard 193 Primer
50 microns 52 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Carboguard 893 150 microns 77 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 62/150
System No. P 01 H Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 36 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 60 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 40 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns
80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 63/150
System No. P 02 H Coating Floors SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
200 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 60 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 40 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
200 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 64/150
System No. P 03 H Coating Helideck SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
510 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536
50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
550 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 65/150
System No. P 04 H Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Concrete type PFP. SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 60 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 66/150
System No. P 04 H 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Intumescent epoxy PFP. SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EP Hempadur 1557 80 microns 54 85 4 hours Unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EP Hempadur 1557 80 microns 54 85 4 hours Unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
5. Remarks
When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 67/150
System No. P 05 H Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Etching with lithoform n°2
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 1555 30 microns 42 85 2 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 1555 30 microns 42 85 2 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 68/150
System No. P 06 H Coating Cadmium or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 1555 30 microns 42 85 2 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 1555 30 microns 42 85 2 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 69/150
System No. P 07 H Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multistrength 4554
375 microns 85 85 16 hours 5 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 60 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multistrength 4554
375 microns 85 85 16 hours 5 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 70/150
System No. 07 H Second P Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 45750
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 71/150
System No. P 08 H Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 4575
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur multi-strengh 4575
300 microns 81 85 6 hours 30 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 72/150
System No. P 08 H second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
200 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
200 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
200 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Hempadur multistrength GF
3587
200 microns 87 85 4 hours 7 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 73/150
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 74/150
System No. P 09 H Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 36 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 200microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 250 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 75/150
System No. P 10 H Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Hempadur 4514 120 microns 60 85 8 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4514 120 microns 60 85 8 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Hempadur 4514 120 microns 60 85 8 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4514 120 microns 60 85 8 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 76/150
System No. P 11 H Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 95 24 hours 1 year
Tie-coat
Intermediate SI Silicone ALU 5691 25 microns 31 85 24 hours unlimited
Finish coat SI Silicone ALU 5691 25 microns 31 85 24 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer SI Hempel's silicone 1690
40 microns 53 85 9 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate SI Silicone ALU 5691 25 microns 31 85 24 hours unlimited
Finish coat SI Silicone ALU 5691 25 microns 31 85 24 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 77/150
System No. P 12 H Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO
150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO
150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO
150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO
150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 78/150
System No. P 13 H Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPPH Hempadur 85671 50 microns 68 85 24 hours 21 days
Intermediate EPPH Hempadur 85671 50 microns 68 85 24 hours 21 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPPH Hempadur 85671 50 microns 68 85 24 hours 21 days
Intermediate EPPH Hempadur 85671 50 microns 68 85 24 hours 21 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 79/150
System No. P 14 H Coating Machines SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 MIO 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hempathane 5521 50 microns 50 85 16 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 80/150
System No. P 15 H Coating Open Rooms/Workshops SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 36 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 81/150
System No. P 16 H Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 82/150
System No. P 17 H Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER HEMPEL
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Galvosil 1570 60 microns 64 90 36 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Hempadur zinc 1536 50 microns 49 85 6 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Hempadur 4508 30 microns 48 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Hempadur 4588 150 microns 80 85 6 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 83/150
System No. P 01 I Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 40 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 84/150
System No. P 02 I Coating Floors SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 250 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 40 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 250 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 85/150
System No. P 03 I Coating Helideck SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Interzone 505 500 microns 88 85 6 hours 4 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Interzone 505 550 microns 88 85 6 hours 4 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Incorporate GPA 900 aggregates for non-slip system
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 86/150
System No. P 04 I Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Concrete type PFP SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 40 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 87/150
System No. P 04 I 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Intumescent epoxy PFP SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 59 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
5. Remarks When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 88/150
System No. P 05 I Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Etching with Foscral
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 50 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 50 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 89/150
System No. P 05 I second Coating Stainless steel as 316L, 904, duplex, … SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Roughness Grit - coarse(C) (ISO 8503-2)
Dust level level 2 maximum (ISO 8502-3)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat VY Interline 955 500 microns 85 80 2 hours 24 hours
Intermediate VY Interline 955 500 microns 85 80 2 hours 24 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Roughness Grit - coarse(C) (ISO 8503-2)
Dust level level 2 maximum (ISO 8502-3)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat VY Interline 955 500 microns 85 80 2 hours 24 hours
Intermediate VY Interline 955 500 microns 85 80 2 hours 24 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks Only on thermally insulated piping or to prevent corrosion risk in interstices
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 90/150
System No. P 06 I Coating Cadmium or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 50 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 50 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 91/150
System No. P 07 I Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 375 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 415 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 92/150
System No. P 07 I Second Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 93/150
System No. P 08 I Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPM Interzone 954 300 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 94/150
System No. P 08 I second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interzone 954 200 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 200 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interzone 954 200 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 200 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 95/150
System No. P 09 I Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 200 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interzone 954 250 microns 85 85 12 hours 14 days
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 96/150
System No. P 10 I Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Intertherm 228 120 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Intertherm 228 120 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Intertherm 228 120 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Intertherm 228 120 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C (Interthane 990)
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 97/150
System No. P 11 I Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat SI Intertherm 50 20 microns 45 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Intertherm 50 20 microns 45 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat SI Intertherm 50 20 microns 45 85 12 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Intertherm 50 20 microns 45 85 12 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 98/150
System No. P 12 I Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interplus 256 aluminium grey
150 microns 83 85 18 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interplus 256 aluminium grey
150 microns 83 85 18 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Interplus 256 aluminium grey
150 microns 83 85 18 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Interplus 256 aluminium grey
150 microns 83 85 18 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 99/150
System No. P 13 I Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Intertherm 228 100 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Intertherm 228 100 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPPH Intertherm 228 100 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPPH Intertherm 228 100 microns 67 85 16 hours 3 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 100/150
System No. P 14 I Coating Machines SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Interthane 990 50 microns 57 85 10 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 101/150
System No. P 15 I Coating Open Rooms/Workshops SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interseal 670 HS 150 microns 82 85 8 hours 4 weeks
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 40 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Interseal 670 HS 150 microns 82 85 8 hours 4 weeks
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 102/150
System No. P 16 I Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 103/150
System No. P 17 I Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER INTERNATIONAL COATINGS
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 22 60 microns 63 90 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 30 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Interzinc 52 60 microns 59 85 4 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Intergard 269 40 microns 47 85 24 hours unlimited
Intermediate EP Intergard 475 HS 150 microns 80 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 104/150
System No. P 01 J Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns
82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
50 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 105/150
System No. P 02 J Coating Floors SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 200 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 40 microns 53 85 90 minutes
unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 250 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 106/150
System No. P 03 J Coating Helideck SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Ra 13/15 microns
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate PY Baltoflake 800 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate PY Baltoflake 800 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks Dust with Carborex 30 aggregates on the first coat of Baltoflake while still wet (not polymerized).
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 107/150
System No. P 04 J Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Concrete type PFP SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes
unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
40 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 108/150
System No. P 04 J 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Intumescent epoxy PFP SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes
unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
40 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
5. Remarks When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 109/150
System No. P 05 J Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Etching with lithoform No. 2
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 140 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 140 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 110/150
System No. P 05 J second Coating Stainless steel as 316L, 904, duplex, … SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Roughness Grit - coarse(C) (ISO 8503-2)
Dust level level 2 maximum (ISO 8502-3)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat VY Chemflake special 500 microns 96 80 2 hours 24 hours
Intermediate VY Chemflake special 500 microns 96 80 2 hours 24 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Roughness Grit - coarse(C) (ISO 8503-2)
Dust level level 2 maximum (ISO 8502-3)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat VY Chemflake special 500 microns 96 80 2 hours 24 hours
Intermediate VY Chemflake special 500 microns 96 80 2 hours 24 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks Only on thermally insulated piping or to prevent corrosion risk in interstices
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 111/150
System No. P 06 J Coating Cadmium Or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 140 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 140 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 112/150
System No. P 07 J Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPGF Marathon 375 microns 80 85 12 hours 3 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution
Binder
SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%) RH max (%)
min max
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Marathon 415 microns 80 85 12 hours 3 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 113/150
System No. P 07 J Second Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 300 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 300 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 300 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 300 microns 96 85 2 hours 12 hours
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 114/150
System No. P 08 J Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 300 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 300 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 115/150
System No. P 08 J second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 200 microns 80 85 10 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 200 microns 80 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 200 microns 80 85 10 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Jotamastic 87 GF 200 microns 80 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 116/150
System No. P 09 J Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 200 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 250 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 117/150
System No. P 10 J Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EP Tankguard storage 120 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 120 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EP Tankguard storage 120 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 120 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C (Hardtop AS)
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 118/150
System No. P 11 J Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat SI Solvalitt 20 microns 35 85 3 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Solvalitt 20 microns 35 85 3 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat SI Solvalitt 20 microns 35 85 3 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Solvalitt 20 microns 35 85 3 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 119/150
System No. P 12 J Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Tankguard storage 150 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 150 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Tankguard storage 150 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 150 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 120/150
System No. P 13 J Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 200 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Tankguard storage 200 microns 63 85 10 hours 30 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 121/150
System No. P 14 J Coating Machines SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Primastic 150 microns 78 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Primastic 150 microns 78 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Hardtop AS 50 microns 50 85 5 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 122/150
System No. P 15 J Coating Open Rooms SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 60 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Jotamastic 87 150 microns 82 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 123/150
System No. P 16 J Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 124/150
System No. P 17 J Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER JOTUN
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Resist 86 60 microns 60 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
30 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Primastic 150 microns 78 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPRZ Barrier 50 microns 53 85 90 minutes unlimited
Tie-coat EP Penguard Tie coat 100
40 microns 42 85 6 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Primastic 150 microns 78 85 10 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 125/150
System No. P 01 S Coating Deck and Equipment SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC58 60 microns 65 95 12 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 126/150
System No. P 02 S Coating Floors SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%) min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58 60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 127/150
System No. P 03 S Coating Helideck SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover Armour compound
3000 microns 84 85 24 hours 90 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids
(%) RH max.
(%) min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover Armour compound
3000 microns 84 85 24 hours 90 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks * Non-slip granular coating.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): None
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 128/150
System No. P 04 S Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Concrete type PFP SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Applicable to concrete type PFP.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 129/150
System No. P 04 S 2nd Coating Fire-Proofed Surfaces; Intumescent epoxy PFP SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate
Finish coat (above PFP)
PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
5. Remarks When using intumescent epoxy, primer coat shall be approved by passive fire protection supplier.
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 10 years for overall paint + PFP system
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Cross cut test class 0, ISO 2409
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 130/150
System No. P 05 S Coating Galvanized Surfaces SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Etching with lithoform No. 2
Rinsing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 280 50 microns 57 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Etching
Rinsing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 280 50 microns 57 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 2 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 131/150
System No. P 06 S Coating Cadmium or Zinc-Plated Bichromated Surfaces SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Degreasing
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 280 50 microns 57 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Degreasing
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 280 50 microns 57 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): Only cracking blistering, and flaking requirements
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 132/150
System No. P 07 S Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
365 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
365 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 133/150
System No. P 07 S Second Coating Jacket Zone 1 SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
300 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
300 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
300 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
300 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 6 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 134/150
System No. P 08 S Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Sigmaguard CSF 300 microns 100 85 24 hours 20 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Sigmaguard CSF 300 microns 100 85 24 hours 20 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 135/150
System No. P 08 S second Coating Jacket Zone 2 SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPGF Sigmacover TCP glassflake
200 microns 84 85 16 hours 28 days
Finish coat
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years, cracking, blistering & flaking requirements only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 136/150
System No. P 09 S Coating Jacket Zone 3 SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
4. Remarks Zone 1 Splash zone Zone 2 Immersed zone Zone 3 Emerged zone
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 137/150
System No. P 10 S Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 (aluminium grey)
120 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 (aluminium grey)
120 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 (aluminium grey)
120 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 (aluminium grey)
120 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks Polychromy possible up to 100°C (Freitane 501 or Sigmadur gloss)
Operating temperature resistance: less than 120°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 138/150
System No. P 11 S Coating Surfaces Subject to High Temperatures SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat SI Sigmatherm Siloxane
30 microns 24 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Sigmatherm Siloxane
30 microns 24 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat SI Sigmatherm Siloxane
30 microns 24 85 16 hours unlimited
Intermediate SI Sigmatherm Siloxane
30 microns 24 85 16 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 400°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 139/150
System No. P 12 S Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 125 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 90°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 3 years only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 4 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 140/150
System No. P 13 S Coating Insulated Surfaces SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Intermediate EPM Sigmacover 435 60 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 200°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): 1 year only
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 141/150
System No. P 14 S Coating Machines SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
3. Repair system
Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat PUR Sigmadur gloss 50 microns 56 85 12 hours unlimited
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 142/150
System No. P 15 S Coating Open Rooms/Workshops SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Specific guarantee requirements (different from § 9.5): none
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 143/150
System No. P 16 S Coating Air Conditioned Rooms SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 - -
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer
Tie-coat
Intermediate
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 3
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 144/150
System No. P 17 S Coating Sub-Concrete Floors SUPPLIER SIGMA COATINGS-FREITAG
1. Surface preparation Grade of cleanliness Sa 3 (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Roughness Grit-medium (G) (ISO 8503-2: 1988)
2. Coating system
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer ESI Sigma Tornusil MC 58
60 microns 65 95 24 hours unlimited
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
3. Repair system Grade of cleanliness Sa 2 ½ (ISO 8501-1: 1988)
Interval between coats @ 20 °C Constitution Binder SUPPLIER's
reference Nominal
thickness Volume of solids (%)
RH max. (%)
min. max.
Primer EPZ Sigmarite Zinc primer
60 microns 46 85 6 hours 6 months
Tie-coat EP Sigmacover 522 40 microns 60 85 8 hours 6 months
Intermediate EP Sigmacover 456 150 microns 65 85 20 hours unlimited
Finish coat
4. Remarks
Operating temperature resistance: less than 80°C
Qualification / acceptance requirements: Minimum mechanical pull-off test value of 3 Mpa (mechanical tester)
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 145/150
Appendix 4 Colour coding
1. Colours Basic colours are: Yellow – RAL 1003
Black – RAL 9005 Red – RAL 3001 Aluminium grey for high temperature
2. Piping identification: Pipes shall be identified according to carried fluid as stipulated in the attached colour coding tables.
Note 1: The basic identification colour shall be sprayed as a band X mm wide around the pipe at a maximum of 2 m intervals and on either side of each valve, fitting, wall penetration and any other places where identification of the fluid is necessary.
Note 2: The fluid identification colour shall be sprayed as a band Y mm wide all around the pipe and placed in the middle of the basic identification colour.
Note 3: Code indications, (i.e. information regarding the nature of the fluid and direction of flow arrows), shall be painted in black letters on the white pipe background adjacent to the basic identification colour band. The flow direction shall be indicated by a repetition of the basic and fluid identification colours sprayed downstream at Y mm apart and Y mm wide, as shown below.
Ex 1 :
Ex 2 :
100100 150150
150
50
5050
50 mm
mm
400 mm
Basic identification colourFlow direction indication
Fluid identification colour
X
X Y
Y
4"
24"
Y
Y
Y mm
PIPE O. D.
75
X mm 400250150
> 24"
15010050
600
<= 6" >6"- =<12" >12"- =<24"
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 146/150
PIPELINE MARKINGSERVICE FLOW DIRECTION
Br
Br
DbDb DbDb
LB LB
LB LB
CRUDE OIL HC
DIESEL OIL DO
HYDRAULIC OIL HO
LUBE OIL LO
SEAL OIL SO
HELIFUEL HE
CONDENSATE / NGL CD
NAPHTA NH
PROCESS GAS PG
FLARE GAS FL
HGHYDROCARBON (GAS)
FUEL GAS FG
GAS INJECTION GI
EXHAUST EX
INERT GAS IG
INSTRUMENT AIR IA
PLANT AIR PA
LB LB LB
R
ATMOSPHERIC VENT ATH
HALON GAS HLG
GLYCOL GLC
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
Br
Br Br
Br Br
Br Br Br
BrBrBr
BrBr
BrBr Br
Br Br
Br Br
V V
V V
V V
V V V
Yo
Yo Yo
Yo Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo
Yo Yo
Yo Yo
Yo Yo
Yo
YoYo
Yo
R
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 147/150
PIPELINE MARKINGSERVICE FLOW DIRECTION
METHANOL
FREON
CHEMICAL INJECTION
H. P. STEAM
L. P. STEAM
L. P. STEAM CONDENS.
WATER INJECTION
SEA WATER
PROCESS WATER
COOLING WATER
FIRE WATER
DRINKING WATER
UTILITY/FRESH WATER
COLD WATER SERVICE
CHILLED WATER
HOT WATER SERVICE
WASTE SEWAGE
ME
F
CL
SH
SL
SC
WI
SW
PW
CW
FW
DW
UW
CWS
CHW
HWS
WS
OILY WATER
OPEN DRAIN
HYDRO. CLOSED DRAIN
OL
OD
DR
LBLB
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
V V
V V
VBr Br
V V
SSS Bl Bl
S DBDBS S
SG G SG
G G
G
G G
G G
R
G G G
GG G
G G G
G G G
G G GDB DB
LB LB
LB LB
LB LB
LB LB
LB LB
W
W
W
BlBl
Bl Bl
Bl
Bl
Bl
Bl
WG G GLB LB
R
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 148/150
PIPELINE MARKINGSERVICE FLOW DIRECTION
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
WASTE OIL DRAIN DRBlBl
CEMENT LIQUID CE
BULK BARYTES BB
BULK CEMENT BC
HIGH PRES. CEMENT HPC
L. P. OIL MUD LM
MUD OIL MO
H.P. OIL MUD HM
KILL FLUID KF
GG G G
DB DB
BrBr
Br Br
DB BrBr DBBr
Br RBrBr R
V V
V
V
V
V
V VV
3. Colour for topcoat of all other equipment and platform areas
3.1 Exterior
Jacket zone 2 (immersed) Traffic grey
Jacket zone 1 (splash zone) including casings Brown
Jacket zone 3 (emerged) Yellow
Pipe supports Same as surrounding structure
Lighting posts White
Guard rails (Handrails) White
Pedestal cranes (moving parts) Red/white stripes
Pedestals Same as surrounding structure
Bridge structure Yellow
Tanks, vessels, heat exchangers White
Pipework Base colour: white Identification (See Appendix 2 above)
All equipment and packages Light grey
Internal walls/ceilings of equipment enclosures White
Internal flooring of equipment enclosures Brown red
Fire pump enclosures: External walls Internal walls & ceiling
Red White
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 149/150
Control Panels Light grey
Moving parts and overhead obstructions Red/white stripes
Fire fighting equipment and piping Red
Stairways and associated structures White
Runway beams (external and internal) Yellow/black stripes
Escape routes (external and internal) Black/yellow stripes
Drilling derricks and radio tower Red/white stripes
Floors, decks and walkways Brown red
Doors Green
Buildings, walls, doors & window frames (except for Fire Pump Enclosures)
White
Helideck structural Yellow
Helideck Surface Green
Helideck markings White/yellow
Life boat davits Yellow
Grating Same as support frame colour
Netting framing White
Flare (excepted top of flare to be aluminium) Red/white
3.2 Interior of Technical Areas/Buildings
Structural Steel Yellow
Cladding and Ceiling * White
Floors * Brown red
Tanks, Vessels, Heat exchangers and pipework White Piping identification: see section 2
Pumps and Motors Light grey
Skids and Packages Light grey
Main generator and emergency generator packages Light grey
Compressor Enclosures Light grey
Control Panels, gearswitch, and transformers Light grey
Fire Fighting Equipment (inc. diesel engine and piping) Red
Doors First Aid Box
Green Green
Instruments Manufacturer’s standard
Moving parts and overhead obstructions Red/white stripes
Escape Routes Black/yellow stripes
Exploration & Production
General Specification Date: 10/05
GS EP COR 350 Rev: 05
Appendix 4
This document is the property of Total. It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorisation from the Company.
Page 150/150
* Except Control Room, Technical Room, Laboratories and other specific areas. Colour choice for these to be determined based on Vendor's standard systems or COMPANY requirements.
Interior of living quarter modules and offices to be submitted to COMPANY approval.
2.4 Colours The Colours specified shall be in accordance to RAL K1. SUPPLIER colour names or reference numbers shall not be used as reference.
Colour Code for pipeline marking RAL Reference
Yellow Y 1003 Red R 3001
Brown red BR 3009 Light blue LB 5015 Dark blue DB 5003 Light grey LG 7035
Traffic grey TG 7042 White W 9010 Black Bl 9005 Green G 6001 Violet V 4005
Yellow ochre Yo 1006 Brown Br 8003
Silver grey S 7001
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
PART C1
HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS
Prepared by : Mr. David John (PHS/L) Signature : Date :
Reviewed by : Mr. Prisdapunt P. (PHS) Signature : Date :
Approved by : Mr. Chitrapongse K. (PEP) Signature : Date :
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
1. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Table of Contents 2. Introduction 3. Definitions 4. Abbreviations 5. Compliance With Laws, Company Rules and Procedures, Industry
Standards and Norms 6. Company Representative 7. Contractors Representative 8. Health and Medical 9. Health, Safety and Environment Training of Contractors Personnel 10. Work Competency 11. Risk Assessment 12. Contractor Work Health, Safety and Environment Plan and Procedures 13. Personal Protective Equipment 14. Hazardous Substances/Dangerous Goods 15. Waste Management 16. Equipment Inspections 17. Travel To and From Company Site 18. Site Liaison 19. Discipline of Contractors Personnel 20. Health, Safety and Environment Committee Meetings 21. Reporting 22. Pre-Job Safety Meetings and Tool Box Talks 23. Emergency Response 24. Security on Company Sites 25. Rule of Two and Buddy System 26. Camp Accommodation Standards (onshore) 27. Public Relations 28. Land Transportation safety Rules 29. Drills Appendix 1 Medical Examination Appendix 2 Health, Safety and Environment Training Appendix 3 PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Training Request Form Appendix 4 Equipment Health, Safety and Environment Requirements Appendix 5 Summary of Health, Safety and Environment Instructions for
Contractors (English and Thai Versions)
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 3 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
2. INTRODUCTION These Health, Safety and Environment Instructions for Contractors outline the general conditions for Works and Service Contracts governing the duties of CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL when performing SERVICES for PTTEP. It is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR to read and understand these instructions, and to ensure they are implemented by CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL. These Instructions apply to all COMPANY Sites, unless specifically stated otherwise e.g. differences between onshore and offshore sites. 3. DEFINITIONS The following definitions apply: Accident an unplanned/unwanted event or chain of events which
has resulted in harm to people, and/or damage to property and/or the environment and/or loss of production.
Company PTT Exploration and Production Public Company Limited.
Company Representative
A person employed by COMPANY and responsible for the management and day to day running of a particular Contract.
Company Site Any area managed by COMPANY including but not limited to third party owned installations working in a geographical zone managed by COMPANY.
Company Site Representative
The most senior person for COMPANY based at the COMPANY SITE.
Contract Document Agreement between two or more parties to provide work by one party for the other. May be in the form of a Contract or Service Order.
Contractor Any company, organization or individual performing work under a contract document.
Contractors Personnel
Either the employees and/or agents and/or servants of the CONTRACTOR including subcontractors.
Contractors Representative
A person nominated by the CONTRACTOR with responsibility for all aspects of contract management and administration including HSE issues.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 4 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 5 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Equipment Any equipment and materials, complete with spare
parts, tools, ancilliary equipment and consumables provided and deemed sufficient by CONTRACTOR for properly performing works or services in accordance with the requirements of the contract or service order.
Incident An unplanned event or chain of events which under slightly different circumstances, could have resulted in harm to people and/or damage to property and/or the environment, and/or loss of production.
Services Scope of work as defined within a particular contract document.
Unsafe Act/Condition Any situation or event having the potential to contribute to an accident.
Work Provision of services by CONTRACTOR for COMPANY that may include only labour or labour, goods and/or transportation.
Worksite Any area where CONTRACTOR performs WORK or SERVICES.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 6 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
4. ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations apply: HSE Health, Safety and Environment ISO International Organisation for Standardisation IWCF International Well Control Forum PHS PTTEP HSE Department PTTEP PTT Exploration and Production Public Company
Limited STWC Safety, Training, Watch Keeping Convention (and
Code), International Maritime Organisation.
5. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, COMPANY RULES AND PROCEDURES, INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND NORMS
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees and warrants that all works and services provided by CONTRACTOR shall be governed and realized in a manner complying with the following, in order of precedence: Ø Works and Services shall comply with all applicable National Laws of the
country where works or services are to be performed. For works or services in Thailand particular attention is drawn to the maximum number of working hours allowed for onshore and offshore operations, and the maximum duration of stay offshore per rotation, as defined by Thai legislation (Article 10 of Labour Protection Act BE 2541 dated 19th August 1998).
Ø Works and services shall comply with COMPANY rules and procedures in
force at the worksite. CONTRACTOR must read and comply with the latest versions of the following documents: o PTTEP HSE Policies and Procedures Manual (all sites) o Bongkot Field General Standing Instructions (Bongkot) o Bongkot Field Safety Standing Instructions (Bongkot) o Bongkot Field Logistics Instructions (Bongkot) o PTTEP Scaffolding Regulations (all sites) o General Marine Instructions (Bongkot) o General Instructions for Lifting Equipment (all sites) o Songkhla Logistics Base Operating Instructions (Songkhla) o General Instructions for Use of Radioactive Sources on Bongkot Field
(Bongkot) o Typhoon Response Plan (offshore and Songkhla)
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 7 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
o PTTEP Crisis and Emergency Management Plan (all sites) o Bongkot Field Emergency Procedures (Bongkot) o Offshore Spill Contingency Plan (offshore) (note: list of documents required may be adjusted according to scope
of CONTRACT).
Ø CONTRACTORS must particularly note the requirement of SITE permit to work/safety notification procedures and ensure strict compliance with them. Work must not start before a permit is issued; work must not exceed the scope defined on the permit and all HSE precautions defined on the permit must be followed.
Ø Works and services shall comply with relevant industry standards, norms
and internationally recognized codes of practice. Failure by CONTRACTOR to comply with these HSE Instructions for Contractors, or any of the above documents, will be regarded as a serious matter by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR will be liable for costs associated with delays to work and remedial actions required to achieve compliance. Exceptions to these HSE Instructions for Contractors may be requested in writing by CONTRACTOR. Such requests must be addressed to the PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department and justify why they are being made and alternative arrangements to ensure an equivalent HSE standard is maintained. PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department will review exceptions requested and respond in writing whether accepted or not. Exceptions are not routinely granted by PTTEP 6. COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE The COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE is responsible for: Ø Ensuring this document is referenced in all relevant call for tender and
contractual documents. Ø Ensuring the CONTRACTOR is fully aware of PTTEP HSE requirements.
See PTTEP HSE Procedure B8, HSE Management of contractors. This includes completing a contractor evaluation at the end of a contract
Ø Issuing packs of Unsafe Act/Condition, Incident/Accident and Pollution/Spill
Report Forms to CONTRACTOR. Ø Periodically checking that CONTRACTOR is fulfilling HSE obligations.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 8 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø Acting as focal point for HSE issues between CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
Ø Ensuring that the PTTEP Safety and Quality Inspector at Songkhla
Logistics Base is given sufficient time to inspect CONTRACTOR equipment before dispatch offshore.
7. CONTACTORS REPRESENTATIVE The CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIVE is responsible for: Ø Ensuring that PTTEP HSE requirements are taken into account during all
stages of the CONTRACT. Ø Ensuring that all legal and PTTEP HSE requirements are complied with
during execution of work. Ø Carrying out periodic checks to ensure CONTRACTOR personnel at
worksite are complying with HSE requirements. Ø Acting as focal point for discussions on HSE issues with COMPANY. Ø Ensuring CONTRACTORS equipment complies with PTTEP HSE
requirements and is inspected by PTTEP Safety and Quality Inspector before dispatch offshore.
Ø Ensuring all incidents/accidents involving CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL
are investigated (with PTTEP) and recommendations to prevent recurrence are closed out.
8. HEALTH AND MEDICAL CONTRACTOR shall ensure that CONTRACTOR’S personnel are medically fit for the job they are assigned to. All CONTRACTORS personnel working on a COMPANY SITE must have a valid medical certificate showing fitness for work. All costs of medical examinations shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall submit copies of medical certificates (declaring FIT/UNFIT for work only, not the detailed certificate) for personnel prior to travel offshore or commencement of work at onshore sites to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. Medical certificates are valid for 12 months only and shall be renewed before expiry. Catering personnel must have medical examinations every 6 months.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 9 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Whenever a person has been absent from work for more than 3 days due to illness or injury, CONTRACTOR shall arrange for a medical examination to be performed before the person is allowed to return to work. The medical certificate must be submitted to COMPANY and must state that the person is medically fit before they are allowed to return to work. COMPANY also reserves the right to request medical examination of CONTRACTOR’S personnel at its discretion. The health examination should be performed by a physician or by nursing staff directly under the physician’s supervision in a PTTEP designated and approved medical center or a medical center which meets requirements covered in the OGP report “Standards for Local medical support” (ref.6.44/222). The assessment should be met requirements covered in the OGP report “Health assessment of fitness to work in the E & P industry (ref.6/46/228) Contracted personnel are categorized into 2 groups for medical examination as follows:- - Onshore Worker Medical Checklist (as a minimum): Physical Check-up include BMI, Chest X-Ray, Dental Examination, Vision
and test for color-blindness. - Offshore Worker Medical Checklist: Physical Check-up include BMI, Chest X-Ray, Vision and test for color-
blindness, Complete Blood Count, Cholesterol, Triglyceride, HDL, Uric Acid Test, Blood Test for Sugar, Urine Examination, SGOT, SGPT, Alkaline Phosphatase, Bun Creatinine, Lead in Blood, ESR, Mercury in blood test, EKG Test, PSA – Prostate Specific Antigen, HBs Ag, HBs Ab, HBc Ab, Audiogram, VDRL Antibody, HIV Antibody, Stress ECG, Dental Examination.
Contents of a health examination must include the items/procedures listed in Appendix 1. After assessment of a medical report the physicians or nursing staff issue a medical certificate. The medical certificate form is also attached in Appendix1. Small amounts of mercury occur naturally in the gas and condensate reservoirs on Bongkot Field. This mercury contaminates certain sections of the offshore hydrocarbon process equipment mainly in the form of sludge in process vessels. CONTRACTORS involved in work where their employees may be exposed to mercury (eg vessel cleaning) are required to arrange mercury medical screening for employees before work starts and after it finishes. Such screening is to be at CONTRACTORS expense. Medical screening for mercury can be undertaken by:
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 10 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
International SOS, Diethelm Tower, 93/1 Wireless Road, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330. Telephone 02 256 7146 Fax 02 256 7151 CONTRACTOR shall maintain its facilities and vessels free of insects and vermin. De-rating certificates are required for vessel.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 11 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
9. HSE TRAINING OF CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL CONTRACTOR shall ensure that CONTRACTORS personnel have received adequate HSE training before commencing work. CONTRACTOR shall, at its own cost, ensure that CONTRACTORS personnel have undergone HSE training as detailed in PTTEP HSE Procedure B2 HSE Training, based on their work functions, work category and place of work. Copies of valid HSE training certificates shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that HSE training is renewed before expiry of the validity date, and re-submit new certificates. PTTEP operate a Safety Training Centre in Songkhla. This Training Centre can provide courses in the following subjects: Ø Basic fire fighting Ø Helicopter underwater escape Ø Sea survival Ø Offshore HSE orientation Ø Breathing apparatus CONTRACTOR may arrange for their personnel to attend HSE training at the Songkhla Safety Training Centre. COMPANY provides such training free of charge. However, CONTRACTOR is still responsible for transport and subsistence costs (hotels, meals) of their personnel while attending training. CONTRACTOR should make requests for training using the form in Appendix 3. A valid medical certificate must be submitted before attending training. CONTRACTORS supervisory personnel working on Bongkot Field must attend a permit to work training course including competence assessment. In addition if CONTRACTORS works involve the potential for exposure to employees must attend a mercury hazard briefing. Low levels of hydrogen sulphide occur in some areas of Bongkot Field. CONTRACTORS personnel will be briefed on hazards and precautions required offshore. CONTRACTORS employees are expected to participate in HSE drills and exercises held at COMPANY SITE as required.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 12 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
CONTRACTORS personnel will be expected to participate in on-the-job training as required. COMPANY reserves the right to administer theoretical and practical tests to any of CONTRACTOR’S personnel and to reject any personnel deemed unsuitable. HSE training of registered marine personnel eg vessel crew, shall be in compliance with the latest edition of the Safety, Training and Watchkeeping Convention and Code issued by the International Maritime Organisation. 10. WORK COMPETENCY CONTRACTOR will provide suitably qualified and experienced personnel to work on COMPANY sites. CONTRACTOR shall provide copies of work training and competency certificates to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE before work commences. Competency certification is required, but not limited to, the following personnel:
Job Description Competency Certification
Frequency Issued By
Crane Operators Crane Operator Rigging/Slinging
Annually Every 2 years
ABS or approved by 3rd party ABS or approved by 3rd party
Deck Crew Rigging/Slinging Every 2 years ABS or approved by 3rd party
Drilling (Drillers, Supervisors, Superintendents, Tool Pushers)
International Well Control Certificate
Every 2 years. IFP Alert Disaster Aberdeen Drilling School
Fork Lift Truck Driver 3rd Party Every 2 years JCD or approved by 3rd party
Helicopter Landing Officers 3rd Party Every 3 years Alert Disaster Control or TAS
Medics 3rd Party. Diploma minimum
On employment International SOS
Radio Operator Radio Operators Certificate
Riggers Rigging/Slinging Every 2 years ABS Scaffolders 3rd Party eg CITB Welders 3rd Party Well Servicing (Operators, Chief Operators, Supervisors, Superintendents).
International Well Control Certificate.
Every 2 years IFP Alert Disaster Aberdeen Drilling School
Kitchen Staff, Domestics, Galley Staff
On site Food Handling and Hygiene
Annually Approved provider
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 13 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
COMPANY reserves the right to reject CONTRACTOR’S personnel regarded as not having sufficient training or experience to be able to perform work competently.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 14 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
11. RISK ASSESSMENT Before commencing work CONTRACTOR shall undertake a full HSE risk assessment of the work to be performed. CONTRACTOR may use their own risk assessment techniques eg Job Hazard Analysis, or request assistance from PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department. Risk assessments shall break the work down into a series of tasks and identify hazards, frequencies and consequences that may arise during those tasks. Measures in place, or required, to mitigate risks (risk = frequency x consequences) as low as reasonably practical shall be identified. CONTRACTOR shall submit a copy of the risk assessment to PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department for review and approval before work commences. CONTRACTOR will ensure that their personnel at the work site are aware of the risk assessment and follow any precautions identified. CONTRACTORS must note that PTTEP have ISO14001 environmental management system certification for Bongkot, Songkhla Logistics Base, PTTEP 1, and PTTEP Headquarters Building operations. Risk assessments performed must include environmental impacts of CONTRACTORS work e.g. spill prevention/response, waste management etc. 12. CONTRACTOR HSE WORK PLAN AND PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR will submit to PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department for review and approval before work commences, a Plan describing how HSE issues will be managed during the CONTRACT execution. Such a Plan should include details of: Ø HSE training for CONTRACTOR employees. Ø Medical certification of CONTRACTOR employees. Ø HSE audits and inspections planned by CONTRACTOR. COMPANY
reserves the right to undertake at any time inspections or audits of CONTRACTORS work.
Ø Worksite visits by CONTRACTOR management. Ø Liaison between CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVE and COMPANY
REPRESENTATIVE on HSE issues.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 15 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø CONTRACTOR HSE targets and key performance indicators.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 16 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
CONTRACTOR must also submit to PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department for review copies of their HSE Management System documentation, including any relevant HSE procedures specific to the work being done by CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR is performing WORK using floating support units (barges, diving support vessels, survey vessels etc) in the annual typhoon season from 1st October to 31st January, then CONTRACTOR must prepare and submit to PTTEP Health, Safety and Environment Department a Typhoon Response Plan based on the principles of response given in PTTEP Typhoon Emergency Plan. 13. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR shall provide personal protective equipment (PPE) free of cost to their employees. The minimum standard of personal protective equipment to be supplied is:
Item Approved Standard Typical Brand Names Safety Helmet BS 5240, DIN 4840,
AS 1801, ANSI Z 89.1, IOS 3873 TIS 368
MSA, Protection Safety Norton, AO
Hearing Protection – Muffs BS 6344, ANSI Z 3.19
MSA, Protection Safety Norton, AO,Cabot
Hearing Protection – Plugs British Standard or equivalent Norton, North, 3M, AO Cabot
Eye Protection – Spectacles/Glasses
BS 2092, ANSI Z 87.1, DIN 58211, AS 1337
UVEX AO
Eye Protection – Goggles BS 2092, ANSI Z 87.1, DIN 58211
AO, Unico, North, Adco
Eye Protection – Visor/Face Shield
BS 2092, ANSI Z 87.1, DIN 58211
AO, MSA, Unico, Adco
Respiratory Protection – Cartridges/Canisters Mask
BS 2091
Gloves – Cotton BS 1651 Gloves – Leather BS 1651 Gloves – PVC BS 1651 Safety Boots/Shoes – Leather BS 1870, TIS 523 2528,
ANSI Z 41, PT 91, DIN 4843
Red Wing, King, Jalatte
Safety Boots/Shoes – Rubber BS 1870, TIS 523 2528, ANSI Z 41, PT 91, DIN 4843
Auda Jalatte
Coveralls BS 6249 Red Wing, King, Nomex (fire retardant), Saranex-Tyvek (for mercury)
Life Jacket SOLAS Work Vest SOLAS Self Contained Breathing BS 4667
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 17 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Apparatus/Escape Sets
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 18 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Note: other standards may be proposed by CONTRACTOR providing they are at least equivalent to those above. CONTRACTOR shall re-issue new personal protective equipment to employees whenever the condition of existing personal protective equipment has deteriorated beyond reasonable use. CONTRACTOR shall also provide employees with specialized personal protective equipment as identified by risk assessment (see above, section 11). In particular appropriate PPE for potentially hazardous work such as blasting, painting, high pressure air/steam, mercury exposure etc shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. COMPANY reserves the right to review the suitability of CONTRACTOR PPE and request changes/additions if required. COMPANY reserves the right to use the following specific personal protective equipment: Safety helmet Red and white Coveralls Red and light blue CONTRACTOR must not provide their employees with personal protective equipment the same as the above. Any personal protective equipment issued from COMPANY to CONTRACTOR’S employees will be back charged to the CONTRACTOR. 14. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES/DANGEROUS GOODS CONTRACTOR will send a copy of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE before any hazardous substances are shipped to the worksite. The MSDS will be passed to PHS for a risk assessment before use is allowed. Information from the MSDS will be entered into the PTTEP Safechem database. Packaging, labeling, storage and transport of dangerous goods will follow the requirements of the International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Code for helicopter transport, and the International Maritime Organisation International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code for marine. A copy of the MSDS must accompany the hazardous substances throughout all steps in the transportation process. With the exception of CAF gaskets the use of asbestos or asbestos-containing materials is prohibited on COMPANY sites.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 19 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
The use of any surface preparation blasting sand containing silica is prohibited on COMPANY sites.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 20 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Prior to dispatch of compressed gas cylinders to COMPANY sites, CONTRACTOR will provide copies of certificates showing cylinder hydrotest and cylinder contents (batch analysis acceptable). Compressed gas cylinders must comply with the requirements of British Standard BS 349 and be marked with contents, stamped serial number, gross and net weights, and be colour coded. The use of radioactive sources will be in compliance with PTTEP General Instructions for Use of Radioactive Substances on Bongkot Field. The maximum strength source that can be routinely used is < 666 Gigabecquerels. Source strengths < 925 Gigabecquerels may be used if a derogation request is approved. In both cases the maximum dose rate at the boundary must not exceed 25 uGray/hour during exposure. 15. WASTE MANAGEMENT CONTRACTOR must comply with WORK SITE rules for segregation and handling of waste materials. Hazardous and non-hazardous wastes are to be placed in separate, labeled containers. Before any work site is abandoned, CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste from their work locations. Mercury contaminated waste must be segregated from other waste and clearly labeled with hazard warnings. All land used for camp sites and similar will be as much as possible restored to its original condition before abandonment. No material or other structures shall remain in the work areas and camps, unless specifically requested or agreed by COMPANY. 16. EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT shall be subject to inspection by COMPANY before dispatch to and use on any COMPANY site. Practically for equipment being sent to Bongkot Field this means inspection at the Songkhla Logistics Base where inspection is by the Safety and Quality Inspector. This is to ensure that CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT meets the HSE standards required by COMPANY. Any equipment failing to meet required HSE standards will be rejected by COMPANY and may not be used on COMPANY sites. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for costs associated with replacement of sub-standard equipment, delays to work, transportation etc.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 21 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Details of the HSE standards required for equipment are given in Appendix 4. Particular attention is drawn to the requirements for use of mobile diesel engines on COMPANY SITES. No exceptions to these requirements will be permitted. CONTRACTOR must also note the certification requirements for lifting gear and equipment to be used on COMPANY SITES. CONTRACTOR is responsible for ensuring that once their equipment is on COMPANY SITE is further inspected, maintained and repaired in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, or good oilfield practices. 17. TRAVEL TO AND FROM OFFSHORE COMPANY SITE COMPANY will be responsible for transportation of CONTRACTORS personnel from Songkhla to offshore COMPANY SITES, and back onshore on completion of work. This is normally by helicopter. CONTRACTOR must provide COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE with details of personnel travel requirements in advance so that appropriate bookings can be made. Should CONTRACTOR have a reason to perform a late change out of employees who are already booked and listed on helicopter flight manifests, CONTRACTOR must notify details of such changes in writing to COMPANY Traffic Supervisor at the helicopter base in Songkhla. All CONTRACTORS personnel traveling offshore must show proof of identification (passport, driving license with photo or national identity card) at Songkhla helicopter base. CONTRACTORS personnel must be fit to travel offshore and in particular not under the influence of alcohol or drugs. COMPANY will prohibit such personnel from travel offshore. COMPANY reserves the right to submit CONTRACTOR personnel to alcohol/drug testing before transportation. CONTRACTORS personnel and baggage will be searched before transportation for prohibited items including – alcohol, drugs, weapons, equipment containing mercury, magnets, pressurized containers, cigarette lighters, matches and other designated dangerous goods. CONTRACTOR is responsible for transport of employees from Had Yai airport or other location to Songkhla. Such transport must be of a suitably safe standard ie well maintained vehicles with seatbelts and competent drivers.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 22 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
18. SITE LIAISON CONTRACTOR will ensure that upon arrival at a COMPANY SITE their supervisor or person-in-charge reports immediately to the COMPANY SITE REPRESENTATIVE or other designated person before work commences. 19. DISCIPLINE OF CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL CONTRACTORS personnel shall comply with general discipline rules and HSE rules in force at the WORKSITE. Specifically no horseplay, fighting, gambling or fishing is permitted. An appropriate standard of cleanliness and dress is required. Smoking is permitted only designated areas. The possession of drugs – except prescription drugs – and alcohol offshore is strictly forbidden. Prescription drugs must be notified to the COMPANY SITE doctor or medic upon arrival offshore. COMPANY reserves the right to test personnel when on COMPANY SITES for drug and/or alcohol use. Any persons found in possession of drugs and/or alcohol, or to have used drugs and/or alcohol on COMPANY SITES will be removed from SITE immediately, and in the case of drug possession/use will be subject to investigation and penalties under the Laws of Thailand. COMPANY reserves the right to direct CONTRACTOR to remove personnel from SITE whom, in COMPANY opinion, are guilty of misconduct, incompetence, or negligence. If required CONTRACTOR must take such action immediately. CONTRACTORS personnel shall not keep pets on the work site, feed indigenous animals or otherwise encourage wildlife to reside on the premises where work is performed.
20. HSE COMMITTEE MEETINGS HSE Committee Meetings are held regularly at COMPANY SITES. CONTRACTORS personnel and/or CONTRACTORS REPRESENTATIVE may be requested to attend these meetings and participate constructively in HSE issues discussed.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 23 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
21. REPORTING. CONTRACTOR will ensure that all Unsafe Acts/Conditions, Incidents/Accidents and Pollution/Spills are reported without delay to COMPANY. Report forms shall be issued to CONTRACTOR by COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE and are also available at COMPANY SITES. CONTRACTOR will ensure full cooperation in any investigations required to identify root causes and actions to prevent recurrence. This includes providing relevant documentation, personnel interviews, membership of investigation teams etc. COMPANY policy is to operate a “no blame” reporting culture. CONTRACTORS are encouraged to report Unsafe Acts/Conditions and Incident/Accidents. Reporting of environmental incidents is also encouraged in line with ISO 14001 and may be performed using Unsafe Act/Condition, Incident/Accident or Polution/Spill Report forms as appropriate. Contractor shall provide reports on HSE performance. HSE Report shall include, but not be limited to: a) Incident/accident statistics (monthly) b) Pre-incident HSE performance indicators to be agreed with Company
(weekly) c) Waste production and disposal (monthly) d) Tree cutting and land clearance (monthly) (onshore sites only) e) Audit and inspection action points status (monthly) f) Medical statistics (monthly) Use of COMPANY reporting/investigation procedures does not relieve CONTRACTORS obligations for statutory and regulatory reporting. COMPANY reserves the right to direct CONTRACTOR to cease, or not proceed with, any work that in COMPANY opinion is unsafe. If directed to do so such actions will not prejudice any other conditions of the CONTRACT. 22. PRE-JOB SAFETY MEETINGS AND TOOL BOX TALKS Before commencing work CONTRACTOR is required to hold a Pre-Job Safety Meeting involving CONTRACTORS supervision and workforce to explain the work scope, potential HSE hazards and mitigating measures. Thereafter regular HSE Meetings (eg Tool Box Talks) should be held to continue communication on HSE matters.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 24 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
CONTRACTOR will ensure that all such meetings are recorded, listing attendees, subjects discussed and follow up actions. 23. EMERGENCY RESPONSE General In the event of an emergency incident on a COMPANY SITE, the senior PTTEP person permanently based there is the On Scene Commander and will direct the response as per site emergency procedures. CONTRACTORS personnel are expected to follow these instructions/procedures. If the scale and nature of WORK being performed by CONTRACTOR is of sufficiently high importance joint PTTEP – CONTRACTOR emergency procedures may be developed. These will normally be in the form of bridging procedures between PTTEP and CONTRACTOR emergency procedures. Medical Assistance Should CONTRACTORS personnel be injured or become ill on COMPANY SITE where CONTRACTOR has no medical services available, COMPANY undertakes to the best of its abilities to provide medical aid in accordance with the same criteria that apply to COMPANY personnel, unless otherwise requested by CONTRACTOR in writing. In the case of medical evacuation of CONTACTORS PERSONNEL working on COMPANY SITE, COMPANY undertakes, to the best of its abilities, to provide or allow to be used, any transportation means (eg helicopter, vessels, vehicles etc) for carrying CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL to the nearest hospital, unless directed otherwise by CONTRACTOR in writing. In any case any involvement of COMPANY in providing medical assistance shall extend only to the arrival of CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL to the hospital facilities and the costs of all medical assistance rendered by COMPANY including transportation costs to the hospital facilities shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. 24. SECURITY ON COMPANY SITE CONTRACTOR must provide COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE with details of personnel working on site in advance so that appropriate arrangement can be made. Should CONTRACTOR have a reason to perform a change out of employees who are already listed on manifests, CONTRACTOR must notify details of such changes in writing to Company Site Representative.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 25 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
All CONTRACTOR personnel working on site must show proof of identification (passport, driving license with photo or national identify card) at site entrances. CONTRACTOR personnel, baggage and all vehicles will be searched before site entry for prohibited items including – alcohol, drugs, weapons and other designated dangerous goods. 25. RULE OF TWO AND BUDDY SYSTEM The performance of Work shall be so arranged that everyone shall have recourse to the assistance from a second person at any time. Thus, with the exception of low risk environments such as offices or accommodation, no one shall work alone. This applies in particular to personnel in engine or compressor rooms, (boat) drivers, permit men traveling in the Area of Operations, cooks in fly camps and (night) guards. In remote conditions (desert, jungle) a buddy system shall be implemented, where pairs of individuals (or vehicles/boats where applicable) shall keep track of each other. Subject to COMPANY approval, exceptions may be made for individuals performing low risk duties and having a means of communication (e.g. radio). 26. CAMP AND ACCOMMODATION STANDARDS (Onshore) Accommodation shall be subject to COMPANY approval and shall be of a high standard sufficient for all personnel, such that there shall be no overcrowding of rooms or shift usage of bunks. A minimum of 3 m2 per person will be acceptable. As a minimum, one toilet and one shower shall be provided for every ten employees or comply to local statutory requirement. Adequate and clear escape routes shall be available from all areas and be clearly signposted. Large sleeping quarters in camps shall have at least two exits. Adequate emergency lighting shall be available in mess rooms, kitchens and working spaces and along al escape routes.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 26 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
27. PUBLIC RELATIONS CONTRACTORS Personnel shall be aware of the sensitivities in the Area with respect to residents of local communities and shall behave accordingly. Local customs, cultural and religious requirements shall be respected, avoiding challenge, contradiction and/or criticism thereof. COMPANY shall have the right to remove or have removed from Work any of CONTRACTORS Personnel lacking such awareness or otherwise disrespecting local communities and their culture. 28. LAND TRANSPORT SAFETY RULES Land transport shall comply with following rules Seat Belts Seat belts worn in vehicles at all times by driver and passengers. No passengers shall be carried in or on heavy equipment vehicles such as bulldozers, graders, forklift trucks, cranes, etc. Safety Equipment Vehicles shall be equipped with a radio or means of communications, a first aid kit and fire extinguisher. Emergency drinking water and survival kits shall be provided it appropriate. Vehicles, regardless of type or size, shall be fitted with automatic audible reverse alarms. Night driving Driving in hours of darkness shall not normally be permitted outside urban areas. Company may waive this requirement in exceptional cases, but only if local conditions and traffic permit. Journey Management and Vehicle Tracking A journey management system shall be established to monitor and control the movement of vehicles. Drivers All drivers shall have valid driving licenses issued by the appropriate authority for the class of vehicle they are driving. Driving Training Course. Remote Trips A pre-trip assessment and plan shall be prepared for trips into remote areas e.g. deserts.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 27 of 22
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
29. DRILLS The Contractor’s emergency preparedness shall be maintained and tested through regular drills and realistic simulation exercises. These shall include, but not be limited to: 1) Medevac simulation. To be performed within two weeks of the start of
operations and at regular intervals thereafter, not exceeding three months. 2) Evacuation of offices or camp to designated muster area (once a month). 3) Fire drills of designated fire fighting team(s) in camps (once a month). 4) Search and rescue simulation in remote areas (desert, jungle), as for
Medevac simulation. Details of these drills shall be logged (e.g. Response times) and debriefings shall be held after each drill and action/learning point shall be documented and followed up.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 1 - MEDICAL EXAMINATION Medical examinations must be performed at a medical center approved by PTTEP. The list of such centers follows (note CONTRACTOR can propose additional centers of a similar standard not on this list for review and approval by PTTEP). Thailand: Bangkok Bangkok General Hospital Bumrungrad Hospital 2 Soi Soonvigai 7 33 Soi Nana Nua New Petchburi Road Sukhumvit 3 Bangkok 10310 Bangkok 10110 Tel. 0 2318 0066 Tel. 0 2667 1000 Fax. 0 2318 1546 Fax. 0 2667 2525 Phyathai 1 Hospital Phyathai 2 Hospital 364 Sri Ayuthaya Road 943 Phaholyothin Road Ratchatevee, Bangkok 10400 Phyathai, Bangkok 10400 Tel. 0 2254 2620 to 1 Tel. 0 2617 2444 Fax. 0 2245 5488 Fax. 0 2617 2499 Phyathai 3 Hospital Praram 9 Hospital 207/26 Petchkasem Road 99 Rama IX Road Phaseecharoen, Bangkok 10160 Bangkok 10320 Tel. 0 2869 1111 Tel. 0 2248 8020 Fax. 0 2467 6515 Fax. 0 2248 8018 Samitivej Hospital Thonburi 2 Hospital 133 Sukhumvit 49 43/4 Moo18 Bangkok 10110 Boromrachachonnee Road Tel. 0 2392 0011 Taweewattana Fax. 0 2391 1290 Bangkok 10170
Tel. 0 2448 8345 to 58 Fax. 0 2448 3869 Vibhavadi Rangsit Hospital Vichaiyut Hospital 51/3 Ngamwongwan Road 71/3 Setsiri Road Bangkok 10900 Phyathai, Bangkok 10400 Tel. 0 2561 1258 Tel. 0 2271 3452 Fax. 0 2561 1466 Fax. 0 2278 1017
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Suphanburi Supamit Hospital Thonburi-Uthong Hospital 76 Nanekaew Road 2000/22 Moo 6 Tha Phailiang, Muang Malaiman Road Suphanburi 72000 Uthong, Suphanburi 72160 Tel. 0 3550 0283 to 8 Tel. 0 3540 4053 to 9 Fax. 0 3552 2144 Fax. 0 3555 2890 Songkhla Rajindee Hospital Sikarin Hat Yai Hospital 119 Rajindee Road 169 Nipat Songkroh Hat Yai Hat Yai Songkhla 90110 Songkhla 90110 Tel. 0 7422 1040 to 4 Tel. 0 7436 6966 Fax. 0 7422 1039 Bangkok Hat Yai Hospital 54/113 Moo 3 Klongrean Road Hat Yai Songkhla 90110 Tel. 0 7436 5780 Singapore: KN Chin + Associates, 9 Battery Road, Straits Trading Building, Singapore 049910 Tel 656 538 9533
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 3 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Indonesia: International SOS, The Medical Scheme, JL Puri Sakti 10, Setiabudi Building II, Cipete, JL HR Rasuna Said, Kuningan, Jakarta. Jakarta. Tel 62 21 750 6001 Tel 62 21 525 5367 Philippines: Malaysia: Makati Medical Centre, Gleneagles Hospital, 2 Amorsolo Street, 282-286 Jalan Ampamg, PO Box 1236, 50450 Kuala Lumpur. Makati City. Tel 60 03 457 1300 Tel 632 815 9911 Fax 60 03 457 9233 UAE: UK: The American Hospital, Any medical practitioner to PO Box 5566, United Kingdom Offshore Dubai. Operators Association standards Tel 97 14 309 6818. Fax 97 14 336 5190 France: CMETE, 10 rue de Colonel Drain, 75001 Paris. Tel 331 44 96 15 44 And CMETE agencies in Bordeaux, Toulouse, Marseille and Lyon. (Rest of this page is blank)
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 4 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Medical examinations must record the following items (example form): Name: Last Name: Birth date: Age: Company / Address: Date of examination : HN: Blood group & Rhesus: (for new patient only) Height: cm Weight: kg Pulse:
/min Blood pressure:
Vision: Without glasses � Right: 20/ With glasses or contact lens � Left : 20/
Colour blindness:
Normal PHYSICAL EXAMINATION Abnormal Eyes, Ears (Audiogram), Throat, Nose Neck (Thyroid) Lungs and chest including breasts Heart Vascular system ( Varicousities) Abdomen and viscera Lymph Nodes G.U. System Extremities Spine, other Musculockeleton Skin Describe every abnormality in details:
CHEMICAL LABORATORIES Blood chemistry Results Blood sugar Bun Crestinine
Triglyceride Cholesterol Liver function SGOT (units) SGPT (units) CBC WBC cells/m Hct % Hb pm%
L % M % E % B % N %
Urinalysis Colour Appearance Sp. Gr. Ph Albumin Sugar Microscopic WBC /HPF RBC /HPF Epithelial cell /HPF
Stool Examination (optional) For catering staff only
WBC Ova/Parasities RBC Occult blood
Chest x-ray VDRL
HIV (antibody)
VIRUS B HBs Ag Other HBs Ab HBc Ab
Summary of recommendations
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 5 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Type or print Name of Physician: Address:
Signature Date:
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 6 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 1 - MEDICAL CERTIFICATION FORM
Personal & Confidential To : _______________________________________
From : Dr.____________________________________
Hospital _______________________________
Subject : Medical Check-up Information Letter
Following medical check-up on (date) : ______________________________ You are declared :
( ) Fit for offshore work ( ) No follow-up ( ) Follow-up required _______________________________
_______________________________________________
( ) Fit for onshore work ( ) Temporary unfit for offshore work ________________________
___________________________________________________
PARTICULAR COMMENTS & RECOMMENDATIONS FROM EXAMINING MEDICAL DOCTOR
( ) You have no antibodies for Hepatitis B, so vaccination is strongly
recommended ( ) You have antibodies for Hepatitis B, so vaccination is not
necessary ( ) Should follow up with doctor in………….month(s) ( ) Should follow up with doctor as soon as possible ( ) Others: ____________________________________________
__________________________________________________ __________________________________________________
Signature:_______________________ Date :_______________________
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 7 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 1
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 2 - HSE TRAINING Training of CONTRACTORS personnel must be at these PTTEP approved centers. Alternatives (e.g OPITO certified) may be proposed for PTTEP review and approval.
Training Center Combined Sea Survival , HUET & Fire Fighting
Fire Team
Fire Team
Leader
Coxswain Fast Rescue
Craft
IWCF
Norway Asphander & Sikkerhetsoppaering
ü
Borre Havarivernskole ü ü ü Croftholmen Sikkerhetssenter ü ü ü Hogskolen Stord / Hagesund Avd for Sikkerhetstopplaering
ü
ü
ü
ü
Norges Brannskole ü ü ü ü Norsk Sikkerhetssenter as Sund ü ü ü ü North Sea Drilltrainer Havarivensenter
ü ü ü
Nutec Midnor AS ü ü ü ü Sikkerhetssenter Aukra ü Stavanger Maritime Vgs ü ü Sorlandets Sj Oaspirantskole ü ü ü Tromso Maritime Skole ü ü Denmark Danish Offshore School Vangeld
ü
ü
Esbjert Branskole ü ü Sweden Chalmer Tekniska
ü
United Kingdom Fleetwood Offshore Survival Centre
ü
Humberside Offshore Training Assoc
ü ü
Nutec Centre for Safety ü RGIT Survival Centre ü ü South Tyneside College ü Fire Service College ü ü RGIT Montrose ü ü Warsash Maritime ü Holland Maritime Trainingsscentrum BV
ü
ü
Rotterdam E & T Centre ü ü France Bataillon des Marins Pompiers Marseille
ü
Italy APT Bornasco
ü
ü
ü
ü
USA & Canada University of SW Louisiana
ü
Texas A & M University ü PMTI North Vancouver ü Malaysia Sribima Maritime Training Centre
ü
Overseas Technical Services ü Trengganu Safety Training Centre ü
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 1
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Construction and Industrial Safety Training Center
ü
Singapore ALERT Disaster Control
ü
ü
ü
ü
Thailand Unocal Thailand
ü
ü
ü
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 1
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 3 - PTTEP HSE TRAINING REQUEST FORM FAX Part 1
To: PTTEP Songkhla Logistics Base Date: FAO Administration Officer Fax No. : (074) 331 314 Reference: cc: PTTEP Contract Representative FAO _______________________ Fax No. : __________________ From: __________________________________ (name of requesting contractor company) Subject: Request for safety training at PTTEP Safety Training Centre in Songkhla
Part 2 Employee Name: Contract Number:
Nationality: Start date on Site:
Job Title: Required at which Asset site: Part 3
Requested Training:
Requested Date(s):
Medical Certificate attached: yes / no
The submission of a current and valid Medical Certificate issued by a medical centre approved by PTTEP (see section 3.1.2 of Safety Notice to Contractors) is compulsory and is a prerequisite to any training enrolment.
Contractor Representative (name) Signature Date
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 1
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 4 – EQUIPMENT HSE REQUIREMENTS 1. MOBILE DIESEL ENGINES HSE requirements for mobile diesel engines depend upon where the unit will be used. There are 3 classifications of locations: Ø In a Zone 2 Hazardous Area Ø In a safe area i.e. outside Zone 1 and 2 Hazardous Areas. Ø On the deck of a floating support unit (vessel, barge etc) Use of mobile diesel engines in a Zone 1 hazardous area is prohibited. Under no circumstances will PTTEP allow a diesel engine rated for use in a particular area to be used in another area e.g. engine used on floating support will never be allowed onto fixed Bongkot Field facilities. The HSE requirements for use in the above areas follow on the next page.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
PTTEP Equipment HSE Requirements For Mobile Diesel Engines etc Key: M = Mandatory (must be complied with); O = optional (desirable, but not essential)
Requirement Zone 2 Hazardous Area
Safe Area On Floating Support
1. Starting System 1.1 Mechanical (pneumatic/hydraulic) M O O 1.2 Main Powered Electrical Flameproof Starter M O O 1.3 Battery Powered Starter - O O 1.3.1 Battery Starter with Cover + Insulated Terminals M O O 1.3.2 Battery Circuit Breaker Master Switch to Isolate all
Non-Electrical Flameproof Circuits M O O
2. Control System 2.1 Engine Overspeed Shutdown Device e.g. Chalwyn
Valve M M O
2.2 High Exhaust Gas Temperature Indicator M O O 2.3 High Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator M M M 2.4 Low Oil Pressure Indicator M M M 3. Inlet System 3.1 Air Inlet Flame Arrestor (downstream air filter) (see
note 1) M O O
3.2 Cylinder Head Crankcase Breathers (see note 2) M O O 3.3 Manual Emergency Shutdown Device (clearly
marked) M M M
4. Exhaust System 4.1 Water Cooled Exhaust Manifold (see note 3) M O O 4.2 Exhaust Gas Aftercooler M O O 4.3 Exhaust Flame Arrestor on Discharge End of
Exhaust or Combined Arrester/Flame Trap (see note 4)
M O O
4.4 Elevated and Insulated Exhaust M O O 4.5 Insulated Exhaust Surface Temperature Not to
Exceed 250 deg c (see note 5) M O O
4.6 Flapper On Exhaust Outlet to Prevent Water Ingress O O O 5. Cooling System 5.1 Non-Metallic Fan M O O 5.2 Anti-Static Fan Belt M O O 5.3 Guarding Against Rotating Devices M M M 6. Electrical Equipment 6.1 Electrical Equipment Certified Flameproof and
Intrinsically Safe (see note 6) M M O
6.2 Portable Equipment to be Adequately Bonded to Platform Structure
M O O
6.3 Electrical Equipment Must be Effectively Earth Bonded to Main Engine Frame
M M M
7. Filter and Filler Caps 7.1 Dipsticks and/or filter/filler caps to be Screwed
Attachments Or Effectively Secured by Other Means M O O
8. Materials 8.1 Valid Test Certificate for Lifting Points/Lugs Available M M M 8.2 Weight of Skid to be Clearly Indicated On Top M M M 8.3 Class A, B or C Fire Extinguisher Available M M M 8.4 ID (WIN) to be Marked. M M M
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 3 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
8.5 Hand Brake (if wheel mounted) M M M 9. Other Requirements 9.1 Permit to Work for “Hot Work” to Run in Zone 2
Hazardous Area (see note 7) M O O
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 4 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Notes: 1 Not a requirement if air inlet taken from safe area (site arrangement) 2 Cylinder head and crankcase breathers to have relief devices fitted with
flame traps, unless discharging into the induction system downstream of the flame arrestor and upstream of overspeed shutdown device
3 An alternative method of exhaust cooling will be acceptable if proven to achieve maximum allowable surface temperature of 250 deg c.
4 Exhaust flame arrestor to be fitted downstream of manifold, unless exhaust discharges to atmosphere in a safe area, the an arrestor is not required.
5 The maximum surface temperature on any part of the equipment must not exceed 350 deg c with the engine running on rated load after time allowed for temperature stabilization.
6 (a) Simple electrical apparatus/components e.g. thermocouples, photocells, junction boxes etc can be used as an intrinsically safe system without certification providing they do not generate or store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20 uJ, and 25mW in normal or fault conditions. Should also meet insulation crepage and enclosure requirements.
(b) If an intrinsically safe circuit is used in a Hazardous Area connected back to a safe area then a zenner barrier or shunt diode safety barrier is required in order to protect the integrity of the IS unit under fault conditions.
7 Hot work permit required if the diesel engine is running in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area, or running in a safe area but without the mandatory fixtures as defined in this checklist.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 5 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
2. LIFTING EQUIPMENT, WINCHES AND JACKING EQUIPMENT Lifting Equipment Reference must be made to PTTEP General Instructions for Lifting Equipment for full details of requirements for lifting equipment. The main requirements for CONTRACTORS lifting equipment (slings, shackles, pad eyes, cranes etc) are summarised below: Ø CONTRACTOR must submit a “List of Lifting Appliances” to be used
during works to COMPANY. Ø Colour coding of CONTRACTORS lifting equipment will be required. Ø All CONTRACTORS lifting equipment will be inspected prior to dispatch to
COMPANY SITE. Inspection will include signs of obvious damage, clearly marked SWL or MWG and colour coding (long term contracts).
Ø Valid certificates of proof load testing and examination of lifting equipment
must be provided by CONTRACTOR. Such certificates to be issued by Bureau Veritas, Lloyd’s Register, Germanischer Lloyd or American Bureau of Shipping. Any certificates must be certified as true by CONTRACTOR and have CONTRACTOR stamp on them.
Ø Proof load test certificates for lifting equipment have a validity of 4 years.
Examination certificates have a 6 month validity period. It is CONTRACTOR responsibility to arrange re-tests and re-certification, which must also be witnessed by one of the third parties noted above.
Ø CONTRACTOR will maintain a file of copies of lifting equipment inspection
certificates at COMPANY work site. Winches and Jacking Equipment Ø All winches and jacks must have load test certification (eg see ANSI B30.7
or equivalent). Ø All winches and jacks must have the safe working load/lift/pull clearly
marked. Ø All wire ratchets, mounting bolts, hooks and latches, guides and rods must
be in good condition. Hydraulic fluid levels must be checked. Ø No hydraulic fluid leaks should be evident.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 6 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø All wires and ropes must be anchored securely to drums.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 7 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
3. FUEL AND CHEMICAL TANKS HSE requirements for fuel and chemical tanks follow: Ø Tanks must be appropriately labeled indicating contents and hazards. A
Material Safety Data Sheet must accompany the tank. Ø Tanks must have a drip try fitted and an isolation valve on all inlets/outlets. Ø Fuel tanks must be enclosed within a protective cage which itself must be
registered, load tested and certified as lifting equipment. Lifting points must be colour coded, and certificates must have sufficient validity to cover the period for transportation and use offshore, and return onshore.
Ø Fuel tank transportation will be by ship only. Ø Tanks must be free from corrosion and damage. Ø Tank breathers or pressure relief valves must be certified and registered. Ø For chemical tanks, the seals on fill points must be intact, the outlet
protected by a plastic sock and the base free of corrosion. Ø These requirements apply to both full, partially full and empty tanks being
transported off and onshore. 4. CHEMICAL DRUMS AND CONTAINERS HSE requirements for chemical drums and containers of hazardous substances (chemicals, solvents oils etc) are: Ø All drums and containers must be labeled with contents and hazard
information in the English language. A Material Safety Data Sheet in the English language must accompany shipments of drums offshore and when returned onshore.
Ø All drums must be in good condition and free from defects. The bases of
steel drums must be free from corrosion. Ø Caps must be sealed and covered. Ø Drums must be transported in cages, palleted loads are not acceptable.
Lifting slings should be double choker type giving a vertical lift.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 8 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø These requirements apply to full, partially full and empty drums being transported off and onshore.
Ø Glass containers and drums or containers of less than 25 litres must not be
transported loose. They must be in cartons or crated. Cartons or crates must be properly labeled. Each individual drum/container must also be properly marked.
Ø Cartons or crates of mixed chemicals are not allowed. Segregation
requirements must be adhered to. Ø If required, appropriate antidotes for contact, ingestion etc must be
transported with the chemical eg hydrofluoric acid. Ø On site storage must comply with WORK SITE rules. 5. COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT Reference must be made to PTTEP HSE Procedure B17, Compressed Gas Cylinders for full details of HSE requirements. However, the main points are summarized below: Ø Pressure test certificates for compressed gas cylinders must be provided
by CONTRACTOR. Normal standards for pressure testing of industrial gas cylinders are 10 years from date of manufacture and subsequently every 5 years thereafter.
Ø Medical and breathing air/oxygen gas cylinders must be pressure tested
every 4 years. Ø Cylinders must be in good condition and free from defect. The base or
base cap must be free from corrosion. Ø A Material Safety Data Sheet must accompany cylinders being
transported. Ø A certificate stating cylinder contents must be provided by CONTRACTOR.
Batch analysis is acceptable. Ø All cylinders must be transported with the main valve closed and safety
caps securely fitted. Ø All cylinders must be full when transported offshore. Cylinders must be
clearly marked as being full at this stage.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 9 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø It is recommended that cylinders should never be fully emptied when in use as this increases the chance of internal corrosion. Cylinders must be marked clearly M/T when empty.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 10 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
Ø Cylinders must be transported and stored securely in racks or banks. Individual cylinders must always be secured by chain to a stable object.
Ø Cylinder valves and regulators must be free from oil, grease or other
contamination. Ø All compressed gas cylinders must be colour coded to international
standards eg BS 349. Ø Cylinder manufacture and test dates, tare and gross weights shall be
clearly visible. Ø A cylinder key must be available during transportation and use. Ø CONTRACTOR must be aware that specific additional requirements apply
to acetylene gas cylinders that are detailed in PTTEP HSE Procedure B17 Compressed Gas Cylinders.
Ø All hoses connected to compressed gas cylinders must be in good
condition and free from defects. Ø All regulators, valves, burning torches etc must be in good condition and
free from defect. In addition regulators must be certified. Ø A flashback arrestor must be fitted at the regulator end and a non-return
valve at the working tool end of all hoses. 6. ELECTRIC WELDING MACHINES Electric welding machines must have: Ø A clearly marked emergency shutdown device fitted and operable. Ø All connections, controls and switches must be secure and in good
condition. Ø Cables, junction boxes and other such electrical equipment must comply
with the hazardous area zone rating where it is going to be used.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 11 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
7. HIGH PRESSURE, STEAM AND BLASTING EQUIPMENT The requirements for high pressure, steam and blasting equipment are: General: Ø For pressure equipment all residual pressure must be released before
transportation. Ø Pressure vessels must be tested and certified. High Pressure Air Systems: Ø All valves, pipework, hoses and connections must be in good condition. Ø Connections must be fitted with whiplines. Ø The compressor must be fitted with a tested and certified pressure relief
valve. Ø Air nozzles must be fitted with a dead mans handle. Ø An emergency dump valve must be installed. High Pressure Steam Systems: Ø In addition to the above, connections are not normally permitted. However,
if they are used whiplines must be fitted. Ø A tested and operable thermostat must be fitted. Grit Blasting: Ø Sand containing silica is not permitted. Ø The same requirements for High pressure Air Systems above apply. Ø Note: Blasting on live equipment is not allowed. Blasting should normally
be done pipes/vessels etc when shutdown and inerted. Blasting on live equipment. Might be undertaken after full line assessment and Job Hazard Analysis requires permission from PTTEP Inspection and HSE departments. In any case the following must be observed:
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 12 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
§ Wall thickness must be > 50%, to be confirmed by visual and UT inspection.
§ Hot Work Permit to be issued specifying requirements for gas checks, fire protection, standby man, PPE etc.
§ Areas to be blasted clearly identified to workers. § No blasting allowed within 1m of flanges. § Small size blasting nozzle to be used. § Spot basting on corroded areas only.
8. HAND AND POWERED TOOLS Hand Tools: Ø Hand tools must be in good condition and free from defect. Ø Hand tools must be free from oil, grease or other contamination. Powered Tools: Ø Powered tools are those tools relying on any power source other than
manual for operation e.g. pneumatic, hydraulic or electric driven. Ø All power tools must be disconnected and airlines drained for
transportation or when not in use. Ø Safety guards must be fitted for grinders, saws and drills. Bench mounted
tools must have properly fitted and adjusted safety guards. Ø Power tools must be in good condition and free from defect. Damaged and
worn drill bits and grinding discs shall not be used. Ø Whip lines must be available to secure connections. Ø For electric tools, the condition of wires, switches and connections must be
assured. Ø Armored electric cables must be provided. Ø Adequate grounding for electrical equipment and tools must be provided. Ø Handles/hold points for electric tools must be insulated or non-conducting.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 13 of 10
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
9. SCAFFOLDING MATERIALS All scaffolding materials must be to requirements of PTTEP Scaffolding Regulations. Note: aluminium ladders, if not coated with epoxy paint or equivalent, (any use) are prohibited on Company operational sites. 10. CRATING AND CARTONS Ø All cardboard cartons will be sealed securely after inspection of contents.
They must be dry and undamaged. Ø Cartons must be securely palletized or in containers/baskets. Ø All wooden crates must be free of nails, splinters or other damage.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 4
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
APPENDIX 5 - SUMMARY OF HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS (ENGLISH AND THAI VERSIONS)
1. INTRODUCTION This Summary of the Health, Safety and Environment Instructions for Contractors (Part C1 in PTTEP HSE Policies and Procedures Manual) provides guidance for local Contractors to help them achieve the HSE standards required by PTTEP. In case of any questions please refer to the PTTEP Contract Representative or HSE Department. 2. LEGISLATION AND PTTEP RULES AND PROCEDURES Contractors are required to comply with the Laws of the Country where Work or Services are performed. Attention is drawn to the Thai Labour Protection Act BE 2541, 19th August 1998, which restricts working hours for onshore and offshore petroleum operations. Contractors are also expected to comply with PTTEP Rules and Procedures. Contractor will be liable for any delays to work or remedial actions resulting from non-compliance. 3. PTTEP AND CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATIVES Contractors must appoint a Contract Representative to manage the contract and HSE issues with the PTTEP Contract Representative. 4. MEDICAL CERTIFICATION Contractors employees working on a PTTEP site must have a valid medical certificate issued from a medical centre approved by PTTEP. Medical certificates are valid for a maximum of one year. Contractor is responsible for the costs of medical examinations. Contractors employees must be certified as medically fit to return to work if they are absent for more than 3 days due to injury or illness. Some Contractor employees must in addition undergo medical screening for exposure to mercury. PTTEP will advise when this is required.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 4
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
5. HSE TRAINING Contractors employees working on a PTTEP site must have valid HSE training. Personnel working offshore must have attended training at a PTTEP-approved centre in fire fighting and sea survival techniques. Such training is valid for 3 years before it must be renewed. PTTEP operate a training centre in Songkhla which can be used by Contractors. Costs of training are a Contractor responsibility. 6. WORK COMPETENCY Contractors must show their employees are competent to do the job. This is by showing completion of relevant training courses and work experience. 7. RISK ASSESSMENT Contractors must complete a Risk Assessment and copy it to PTTEP to show that hazards occurring during work can be controlled. Break the work into a series of steps, identify what hazards can arise at each step and ensure that actions are taken to control these hazards. 8. HSE WORK PLAN AND PROCEDURES If required, Contractor must submit a HSE Plan covering their work and copies of their HSE Procedures to PTTEP. The HSE Plan should refer to training, medical certification, audits, worksite visits by Contractor managers and HSE targets. 9. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Contractors must provide employees with suitable PPE for the job. The minimum is safety helmet (not red or white colour), coveralls (not light blue colour) and boots. PPE must be of a standard approved by PTTEP. PPE must be replaced by Contractor before it can no longer be used. The costs of PPE are to be met by the Contractor. 10. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES/DANGEROUS GOODS The Contractor must send a Material Safety Data Sheet to PTTEP for all hazardous substances sent to and used on PTTEP work sites. Packaging and labeling must follow the International Air Transport Association Dangerous Goods Code for helicopter transport and the International Maritime Organisation International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code for marine transport. The use of asbestos and blasting sands containing silica is prohibited on PTTEP sites.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 3 of 4
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
11. WASTE MANAGEMENT Contractor must follow PTTEP site waste management rules and ensure hazardous and non-hazardous wastes are segregated and labeled. 12. EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS Contractors lifting gear must have valid 6 monthly inspection certificates and a 4 yearly proof load test certificates issued by a PTTEP-approved third party. PTTEP also have specific requirements for mobile diesel engines, fuel and chemical tanks, chemical drums and containers, compressed gas cylinders, welding machines, hand and powered tools, scaffolding materials and crating and cartons. Check if any of these are to be used on PTTEP site. Lifting gear and equipment above must be checked at PTTEP Songkhla Logistics Base before dispatch offshore 13. TRAVEL TO AND FROM PTTEP OFFSHORE SITES PTTEP will provide transport for Contractors personnel travelling to and from PTTEP offshore sites. Contact the PTTEP Contract Representative to arrange. Proof of identity must be shown before transport eg passport, driving license with photo or national identity card. Personnel must not be carrying prohibited items (drugs, alcohol, weapons, pressurised containers, matches or lighters) and not under the influence of drugs or alcohol. Personnel and baggage will be searched before departure. 14. SITE LIAISON AND DISCIPLINE On arrival at site contact the PTTEP Site Representative before starting work. A Permit to Work must be issued before work starts. No drugs or alcohol are allowed at PTTEP work sites. No fighting, gambling, fishing or horse play is allowed. Personnel found disobeying these rules will be removed from site immediately. 15. HSE PARTICIPATION Contractors personnel are expected to report all unsafe acts/conditions, accidents, incidents or pollution. Contractor participation in site HSE Committees may be required.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 4 of 4
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
16. HSE MEETINGS Contractors must hold a pre-job safety meeting to discuss HSE issues relating to the work scope. Regular HSE meetings must be held throughout the contract duration. All such meetings must be recorded with a list of attendees, subjects discussed and actions to follow up. 17. SECURITY Contractor must provide details of their personnel working on Company Site. Appropriate proof of identity required before contractors personnel may access Company Sites. Vehicles, baggage, equipment etc. are liable to search. 18. TRANSPORTATION Safe transportation must be provided by ensuring drivers have licenses and are trained; vehicles are in good condition; seat belts are worn; trip risk assessments are made when working in remote areas.
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 1 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
สรุปสาระสําคัญขอปฏิบัติดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอมสําหรับผูรับเหมา
1. บทนํา
บทสรุปขอปฏิบัติฯนี้จัดทําเพื่อเปนแนวทางใหผูรับเหมา เขาใจและสามารถปฏิบัติงานตามมาตรฐานดานสุขภาพอนามัยความปลอดภัยและสิ่งแวดลอมของปตท.สผ. ถาผูรับเหมามีคําถาม ขอขัดของใด ๆ โปรดติดตอสอบถาม ตัวแทนปตท.สผ. หรือฝายสุขภาพ ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม ของ ปตท.สผ.
2. กฎหมาย กฎขอบังคับ และวิธีปฏิบัติของปตท.สผ.
ผูรับเหมา ตองปฏิบัติตามกฎหมายไทย โดยเฉพาะกฎกระทรวงแรงงานฯ ฉบับที่ 7 ลงวันที่ 22 สิงหาคม 2541 ออกตามความในพระราชบัญญัติคุมครองแรงงาน พ.ศ. 2541 วาดวยเรื่องจํานวนชั่วโมงทํางานของลูกจางในกิจการปโตรเลียมในฝงและนอกฝงทะเล นอกจากนี้ ผูรับเหมา ตองปฏิบัติตาม กฏขอบังคับและวิธีปฏิบัติ ของ ปตท.สผ. และยอมรับผิดจากความลาชาและขอแกใขอันเนื่องมาจากการไมปฏิบัติตามกฎฯ ดังกลาว
3. ปตท.สผ. และ ตัวแทนผูรับเหมา ผูรับเหมา ตองแตงตั้งตัวแทนมาประสานงาน กับผูแทนปตท.สผ. ในการบริหารจัดการ การปฎิบัติงาน และ งานดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม
4. การรับรองทางแพทย พนักงานของผูรับเหมา ที่ปฏิบัติงานในพื้นที่ของปตท.สผ. ตองผานการตรวจสุขภาพ และมีใบรับรองแพทย ซ่ึงออกโดยศูนย หรือโรงพยาบาลที่ ปตท.สผ. รับรอง และใบรับรองแพทยมีระยะเวลากําหนดใชไดเพียง 1 ป ทั้งนี้ผูรับเหมาตองเปนผูรับผิดชอบคาใชจายในการตรวจสุขภาพของพนักงานผูรับเหมาเอง
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 2 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
5. การฝกอบรมดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม พนักงานของผูรับเหมา ที่ปฏิบัติงานในพื้นที่ของปตท.สผ. ตองผานการอบรมดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัยและสิ่งแวดลอม และสําหรับผูปฏิบัติงานนอกฝงทะเล ตองผานการฝกอบรม การดับเพลิงขั้นพื้นฐาน และเทคนิคการดํารงชีพในทะเล จากศูนยฝกที่ ปตท.สผ. รับรอง ซ่ึงใบรับรองการฝกอบรมนี้มีระยะเวลากําหนดใชไดถึง 3 ป จากนั้นตองฝกใหม ปตท.สผ. มีศูนยฝกอยูที่สงขลา ซ่ึงพนักงานของผูรับเหมาที่ปฏิบัติงานกับปตท.สผ. สามารถขอใชบริการไดโดยไมเสียคาบริการ แตคาใชจายอื่น ๆ ผูรับเหมาตองรับผิดชอบเอง
6. ความรู ความสามารถในงาน ผูรับเหมา ตองแสดงใหเห็นวาพนักงานของผูรับเหมา เปนผูมีความรูความสามารถที่จะทํางานได การยืนยันทําไดโดยยื่นแสดงเอกสารการฝกอบรมและประสบการณในงานของพนักงานของผูรับเหมา ใหแก ปตท.สผ. เพื่อตรวจสอบ
7. การวิเคราะหเพื่อความปลอดภัย ผูรับเหมา ตองทําการวิเคราะหเพื่อความปลอดภัย (Risk Assessment) ใหแนใจวา ภัยอันตรายตาง ๆ ที่อาจเกิดขึ้นระหวางที่ปฏิบัติงาน สามารถควบคุมได และทําสําเนาการวิเคราะหฯ จํานวน 1 ชุด มอบให ปตท.สผ ตรวจสอบ การวิเคราะหฯ ทําไดโดยวิธีการแบงยอยงานออกเปนขั้น ๆ เพื่อหาวาภัยอันตรายในแตละขั้น มีอะไรบาง และ มีมาตรการควบคุมอยางไร
8. แผนงานดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม และคูมือปฏิบัติงาน ถามีการรองขอ ผูรับเหมา ตองจัดสงแผนงานดานสุขภาพอนามัยความปลอดภัยและสิ่งแวดลอมที่เกี่ยวของกับงานที่ทํา และ คูมือความปลอดภัยใหแก ปตท.สผ. แผนงานฯ ตองประกอบดวย การฝกอบรม การตรวจสุขภาพ การตรวจสอบระบบความปลอดภัย การตรวจเยี่ยมของผูบริหาร และเปาหมายทางดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และส่ิงแวดลอม เปนตน
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 3 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
9. กรณปองกันภัยสวนบุคคล ผูรับเหมาตองจัดหาอุปกรณปองกันภัยสวนบุคคลที่เหมาะสมใหแกพนักงานของผูรับเหมาอุปกรณขั้นพื้นฐาน ไดแก หมวกนิรภัย (หามใชสีแดงหรือสีขาว) ชุดทํางาน หรือชุดหมี (หามใชสีฟาออน) และรองเทาบูทนิรภัย อุปกรณเหลานี้ตองตองเปนอุปกรณที่มีมาตรฐานและปตท.สผ.รับรอง อุปกรณฯ ที่ชํารุดใชงานไมไดตองทําการสับเปลี่ยนทันที บริษัทผูรับเหมาตองรับผิดชอบคาใชจายในสวนอุปกรณปองกันภัยสวนบุคคลนี้เอง
10. วัตถุอันตราย ผูรับเหมา ตองจัดสงใบกํากับสารเคมี (MSDS) ของวัตถุอันตรายหรือสารเคมี ที่นํามา หรือใชภายในพื้นที่ปฏิบัติงาน ใหแก ปตท.สผ. วิธีการขนสง จัดหีบหอ และการปดฉลาก ตองทําตามกฎระเบียบสากล การขนสงทางอากาศใหทําตาม กฎสินคาอันตรายของ IATA การขนสงทางเรือใหทําตาม กฎสินคาอันตรายของ IMO หามใช Asbestos และ การ Blasting ดวยผง Silica โดยเด็ดขาด
11. การกําจัดของเสีย ผูรับเหมา ตองปฏิบัติตามกฎระเบียบของปตท.สผ. เร่ืองการจัดเก็บและกําจัดของเสีย โดยตองมีการจําแนกขยะอันตราย ออกจากขยะธรรมดา พรอมติดปายบอกชนิดของขยะ
12. การตรวจสอบอุปกรณเคร่ืองมือ อุปกรณการยก ตองมีใบรับรองการตรวจสอบสภาพทุก 6 เดือน และใบรับรองการทดสอบน้ําหนักการยก ทุก 4 ป ออกโดยผูตรวจสอบที่ปตท.สผ.รับรอง คือ BV, ABS, Lloyds, GL, DNV เปนตน ปตท.สผ. ไดกําหนดมาตรฐานสําหรับ เครื่องยนตดีเซล ถังน้ํามัน ถังเคมี ภาชนะบรรจุสารเคมี ตูคอนเทนเนอร ถังบรรจุแกสมีแรงดัน เครื่องเชื่อมไฟฟาและแกส เครื่องมือกลตาง ๆ อุปกรณนั่งราน การขนสงและการบรรจุหีบหอ ใหสอบถามกอนที่จะนํามาใชในพื้นที่ปฏิบัติงานของ ปตท.สผ. อุปกรณและเครื่องมือดังกลาวขางตนตองผานการตรวจสอบโดยเจาหนาที่ของฐานสงบํารุงสงขลา กอนสงไปที่แทนฯ
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 4 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
13. การเดินทางไปแทนผลิต ปตท.สผ. เปนผูดําเนินการเรื่องการขึ้นลงแทนผลิต ใหผูรับเหมาติดตอกับผูแทนปตท.สผ. ที่ดูแลงานนั้น ๆ โดยตรง กอนขึ้นเครื่องใหแสดงตัวดวย พาสปอรต หรือ บัตรประจําตัวประชาชนหรือใบขับขี่ที่มีรูป ตอเจาหนาที่ หามนําของตองหามติดตัวไป (เชน ยาเสพติด ของมึนเมา อาวุธ วัตถุมีแรงดัน ไมขีดไฟ หรือไฟแชค เปนตน) บุคคลที่เดินทางตองไมอยูในสภาพมึนเมา ติดยา ทางปตท.สผ.จะมีการสุมตรวจคนผูโดยสาร และสัมภาระกอนขึ้นเครื่องดวย
14. การประสานงานและปฏิบัติตามกฎ เมื่อเดินทางถึงแทนผลิต กอนเริ่มงานใหติดตอตัวผูแทนปตท.สผ.เพื่อขอใบอนุญาตทํางาน ไมอนุญาตใหใชสารเสพติดหรือส่ิงมึนเมาในพื้นที่ทํางานของปตท.สผ. หามทะเลาะวิวาทกัน หามเลนการพนัน หามตกปลา หามเลนคึกคนองหยอกลอกัน ผูไมปฏิบัติตามกฎระเบียบดังกลาว จะถูกสงขึ้นฝงทันที
15. ความใสใจดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม พนักงานผูรับเหมาทุกคน เมื่อพบเห็นการกระทําและสถานการณที่ไมปลอดภัย อุบัติเหตุ อุบัติการณ หรือมลภาวะ ตองรายงานใหหัวหนางานทราบทันที ผูรับเหมาอาจถูกเชิญใหเขารวมประชุม คณะกรรมการความปลอดภัยเปนครั้งคราว
16. การประชุมดานสุขภาพอนามัย ความปลอดภัย และสิ่งแวดลอม กอนเริ่มงาน ผูรับเหมาตองซักซอมความเขาใจในกลุม เพื่อความเขาใจที่ดีดานสุขภาพอนามัยความปลอดภัยและสิ่งแวดลอม และจัดใหมีการประชุมดานสุขภาพอนามัยความปลอดภัยและสิ่งแวดลอมเปนประจํา ตลอดระยะเวลาที่ปฏิบัติงานกับปตท.สผ. การประชุมทุกครั้งตองมีรายงานและการจดบันทึก รายงานการประชุมตองประกอบดวย รายช่ือผูเขารวมประชุม หัวขอเร่ือง และการติดตามผล เปนตน
17. ความมั่นคงปลอดภัย ผูรับเหมาตองสงมอบขอมูลสวนบุคคลของพนักงานผูรับเหมาทุกคนที่ทํางานกับปตท.สผ. ใหแกปตท.สผ. ผูรับเหมาตองแสดงตนดวยบัตรที่มีรูปถายตอเจาหนากอนเขาพื้นที่ของปตท.สผ. ยานพาหนะ กระเปาสัมภาระ และเครื่องมือเครื่องใชที่นําไปใชในงานของปตท.สผ. ตองถูกตรวจคนดวย
HSE Policies and Procedures Manual
PART C1 HSE INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTRACTORS PTTEP
Code : SG.PHS.001/03-R2
Page 5 of 5
Effective Date : March 2003
Revision No.2
18. การขนสง ผูรับเหมาตองจัดใหมีการขนสงที่ปลอดภัยโดยผูขับขี่ตองไดรับการอบรมและมีใบอนุญาตขับขี่ที่ถูกตอง ยานพาหนะตองอยูในสภาพดี ผูโดยสารตองคาดเข็มขัดนิรภัย การไปทํางานในพื้นที่หางไกลตองมีการศึกษาความเสี่ยงในการเดินทางตลอดเสนทาง
top related